FactoryTalk IO-Link Device Library Reference Manual

IO-Link Device Library
Release v3.02
Reference Manual
Original Instructions
Rockwell Automation IO-Link Device Library Reference Manual
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize
themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to
be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use
or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for
actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software
described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is
prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
These labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
The following icon may appear in the text of this document.
Identifies information that is useful and can help to make a process easier to do or easier to understand.
2
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Table of Contents 3
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Device Object Libraries Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Other Application Code Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Software and Firmware Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Rockwell Automation® Services and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Rockwell Automation® IO-Link
Device Library
Library Components
Using the Library
Chapter 1
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Compatible Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Compatible Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Summary of Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Footprint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Chapter 2
IO-Link Device Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Library Folders and Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Visualization Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Studio 5000 View Designer Visualization Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Basic Faceplate Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Common Status Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Faceplate Navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Faceplate Revision Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Launch Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Library Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
State Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorInf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
raC_UDT_Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
raC_UDT_Dropdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
raC_UDT_HEX_Code_LookupMember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Architectural Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Chapter 3
Install the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
3
Table of Contents
Download the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Download & Install Studio 5000® Application Code Manager . . . . 49
Register Libraries in Studio 5000® Application Code Manager . . . 50
Importing Logic into Studio 5000® Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Import Library Objects Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Import Rung Logic (4IOL, 8IOL Masters). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Import Rung Logic (5032 Master) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using Studio 5000 View Designer® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Using View Designer Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Configuring View Designer Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using FactoryTalk® View Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Import FactoryTalk View Visualization Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Configuring FactoryTalk View Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Library Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Add-On Instruction Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
FactoryTalk View Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Studio 5000 View Designer® Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Chapter 4
Using Application Code Manager Overview of Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Creating a New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adding & Configuring Device Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adding IO-Link Master I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adding IO-Link Device Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Adding IO-Link Master Device Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Configuring Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Generating Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Importing Displays into FactoryTalk View Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Generating Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Exporting Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using the IO-Link Device Library
with Other Application Code
Libraries
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric
Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032)
4
Chapter 5
Application Code Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Chapter 6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032) . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032) . . . . . . . . . . 107
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Implementation Objects: raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL,
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL,
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032,
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032)
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032) . . . . . . . . . . 129
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
5
Table of Contents
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032) . . . . . . . . . . 135
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_42EF_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_42EF_8IOL
Implementation Objects: raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032 . . . . . . . 150
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric
Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032)
6
Chapter 8
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Add-On Instruction I/O Data
(raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . 160
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_42JT_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_42JT_8IOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Implementation Objects: raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032 . . . . . . . . 175
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor
(raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Chapter 9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
7
Table of Contents
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032 . . . . . 198
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_8IOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor
(raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
8
Chapter 10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_871C_5032). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_871C_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL . . 219
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871C_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_LD_Dvc_871C_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871C_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel
Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Chapter 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_871TM_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_871TM_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_5032. . . . . . . . . . 240
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
9
Table of Contents
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_5032
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL,
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_45CRM_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_45CRM_Type2_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45CRM_5032. . . . . . . . . . . 262
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
10
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
836P - Solid-State Pressure
Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Chapter 13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032 . . . . . . . . 292
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_836P_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_836P_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
11
Table of Contents
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL,
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL,
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032,
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032 . . . . . . . . 320
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_837T_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_837T_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
12
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
856T - 856T Control Tower
Stack Light
(raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Chapter 15
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_856T_5032). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_856T_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_856T_5032. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_856T_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_856T_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_856T_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL,
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL,
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032,
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
13
Table of Contents
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032 . . . . . . . . 380
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_873P_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_873P_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic
Circuit Protector
(raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
14
Chapter 17
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_1694_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Add-On Instruction I/O Data(raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Add-On Instruction I/O Data(raC_Dvc_1694_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
I/O Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_1694_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_1694_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_1694_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_1694_5032. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL,
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_45PLA_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_45PLA_Type2_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
15
Table of Contents
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032 . . . 429
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
46CLR - ColorSight True Color
Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
16
Chapter 19
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_46CLR_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
875L - Capacitive Sensors
(raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Chapter 20
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
FactoryTalk® View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_875L_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_875L_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
17
Table of Contents
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_875L_5032. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_875L_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_875L_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_875L_5032
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiberoptic Amplifier
(raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
18
Chapter 21
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_46DFA_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
45PLA - Polarized Light Array
Photoelectric Sensor
(raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
IO-Link HUB
Chapter 22
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Health Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Trend Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Configure Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45PLA_5032 . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Chapter 20
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
19
Table of Contents
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Configuring FactoryTalk View Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
1732IL_IB16M12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
1732IL_10X6M12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
1732IL-16CFGM12M12L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
IO-Link Master
(raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
20
Chapter 21
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Required Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Controller Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
FactoryTalk View HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Device Definition (raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Add-On Instruction I/O Data (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
InOut Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Output Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Faceplates (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster) . .
574
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Located . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Faceplates (raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Locate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
Fault Warning Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Application Code Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_LD_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster . . . . . . 587
Linked Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Configured HMI Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Table of Contents
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
21
Table of Contents
22
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Preface
Device Object Libraries
Overview
Our Device Object Libraries enable you to easily interface with Rockwell
Automation intelligent devices like drives, motion, network switches, sensors,
IO and more. The libraries contain tested, documented, and lifecycle-managed
objects which can be used with machine builder, process, and packaged
libraries or as standalone components. Device objects include HMI faceplates
for FactoryTalk View ME/SE and Studio 5000 View Designer® software and
provide a user interface that seamlessly integrates with the products.
HMI faceplates are standard display files that provide a common user
interface. These are HMI pop-up screens used to display detailed information
related to a specific instruction or device. In systems that follow ISA 101.1
design guidelines, faceplates are often referred to as Level 4 displays.
Pre-configured Device Objects include an Add-On Instruction Rung and an
HMI Faceplate providing the following benefits:
•
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Detailed Device Data Collection and Delivery
Enhanced Device Status and Diagnostics
Common Control Interfaces maximizing Flexible Automation Device
Selection & Application Code Reuse
Device Object Use Cases:
•
•
•
Basic Device Maintenance and Diagnostics
Virtual Device Operations for Startup and Commissioning
Operator and Program Control for Velocity Machine and Process
Applications
Device Object Libraries may be downloaded from the Product Compatibility
and Download Center. Search for “Library”.
Application Code Manager
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager is a tool that can be used with Device
Object Libraries to streamline project and machine development. This bulk
coding tool allows you to easily design and standardize functionality with
reusable application code.
Enable more efficient project development with reusable libraries of code:
•
•
•
Quickly create and deploy projects through our Application Content
Libraries
Import Rockwell provided application content libraries to expedite
system development
Build your own reusable code that can be managed and deployed across
your entire enterprise
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
23
Preface
•
•
Easily configure objects in bulk with reusable code to increase
application development, no additional programming is necessary
Consolidate content for Studio 5000 Logix Designer, FactoryTalk View
Studio, FactoryTalk Alarms & Events, FactoryTalk Historian to
configure an object a single time and generate content for each of those
software packages.
See the section on Using the Library with Application Code Manager for more
details.
Other Application Code
Libraries
This Device Object Library may be used in harmony with other Application
Code Libraries including other Device Object Libraries (Network, IO, Power,
Safety Device Libraries) or Application Libraries (PlantPAx Process Objects
library, Machine Builder Libraries). All libraries are intended to follow similar
design philosophies to provide a consistent experience for operators and
maintenance staff.
A complete list of Application Code Libraries from Rockwell Automation
follows.
Item
Description
PlantPAx Process Library
Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects provides application templates, Endress + Hauser library objects,
Application Code Manager library objects, and tools and utilities for PlantPAx DCS applications.
Includes the following:
• Graphics for built-in instructions
• HMI images and Help files
• Logix diagnostic objects
• Process objects
• Control strategies
• Sequencer objects
• PlantPAx Configuration Tools for Tags, Alarms and Historian
• Color Change
• Historian -- Asset Framework template and objects
Machine Builder Libraries
Tested, documented and life-cycle managed library objects and faceplates for use with Studio 5000® Application Code
Manager for use primarily with OEM and discrete machine applications.
Common Application Libraries
Commonly used application library objects and faceplates for use with Studio 5000® Application Code Manager
including basic functions like unit conversion and data collection.
Independent Cart Technology Libraries
ICT Libraries for iTRAK and MagneMotion including MagneMover LITE and QuickStick for Studio 5000® Application Code
Manager
I/O Device Library
Provides objects for Rockwell Automation 1756, 1769, 1734, 1794, 1738, 1732E, 1719, 5069, 5094 I/O modules including
pre-configured status and diagnostic faceplates
IO-Link Device Library
Provides IO-Link master and sensor objects including pre-configured status and diagnostic faceplates
Network Device Library
Provides objects for Stratix® switch and Device Level Ring network objects
Power Device Library
Provides objects for discrete, velocity, motion, and power monitor devices
Safety Device Library
Provides safety objects to interface with safety I/O
Condition Monitoring Device Library
Provides Dynamix™ -1444 module and machinery Condition Monitoring applications such as motors and pumps. This
includes FactoryTalk View® SE HMI faceplates and Studio 5000® Application Code Manager implementations.
Electrical Protection Device Library
Provides a standard to represent protection devices within your electrical distribution system
Libraries can be accessed from the
Product Compatibility and Download Center.
24
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Preface
Software and Firmware
Upgrades
When you update software or firmware revisions, we recommend that you
verify the impact on performance and memory utilization before
implementing the upgrade on the production system. For FactoryTalk® View
or ControlLogix® platforms, we recommend that you review the release notes
and verify the impact of the upgrade on performance and memory utilization.
You can also verify the compatibility of the upgrade with the installed software
and operating systems in use on your system. See the Product Compatibility
and Download Center.
Rockwell Automation®
Services and Support
System Support offers technical assistance that is tailored for control systems.
Some of the features include the following:
• Highly experienced team of engineers with training and
systems experience
• Use of online remote diagnostic tools
• Access to otherwise restricted TechConnectSM Knowledgebase content
• 24-hour, 7 days per week, 365 days per year of phone-support coverage upgrade
option
For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation
representative or see http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support.
You can view or download publications at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature. To order paper copies of
technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or
Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
25
Preface
26
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
1
Rockwell Automation® IO-Link Device Library
The IO-Link Device Library is a tested, documented, and life cycle managed
object library. The Device Library provides pre-configured status and
diagnostic faceplates and AOI sets for Rockwell Automation® IO-Link Master
& Sensors devices. The IO-Link Device Objects may be used with Machine
Builder, Process, and Packaged Libraries or as standalone components. IOLink Device Library add-on instructions objects collect, process, and deliver
data between hardware devices and application logic.
The IO-Link Device Library includes Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI
Faceplates for Allen-Bradley IO-Link Sensor and Master products.
This document includes the functional requirements of the IO-Link Sensor
and IO-Link Master device objects.
The IO-Link Device Library may be downloaded from the Product
Compatibility and Download Center. Search for IO-Link Device Library.
Compatibility
Compatible Software
•
•
•
•
Studio 5000® Logix Designer v30.02.00, v31.02.00, v32.02.01, v33.00.00,
v34.01.00, v35.00.00, v36.00.00 for PAC Application Development
Studio 5000® Application Code Manager v4.0 and later for bulk code
configuration
Studio 5000 View Designer® v8.00 and later for PanelView 5000
Application Development
FactoryTalk® View Studio v10.00.01 and later for PanelView Plus
Application Development and FactoryTalk® View SE Application
Development
Compatible Hardware
•
•
•
•
•
PanelView 5500 with v8 or later firmware
PanelView Plus with v10 or later firmware
ControlLogix 5580 or ControlLogix 5570 controller with v30.011 or later
firmware
1732E-8IOLM12R ArmorBlock 8-Channel IO-Link Master Module with
v3.012 or later firmware
1734-4IOL/K POINT I/O 4-Channel IO-Link Master Module with v1.011
or later firmware
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
27
Rockwell Automation® IO-Link Device Library
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Summary of Changes
5032-8IOLM12DR 8 IO Link Channel, 8 Configurable Channel, 4 Pin
Power, M12 Master Module with 2.011 or later firmware.
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR 8 IO Link Channel, 8 Configurable Channel,
M12L Power, M12 Master Module with 2.011 or later firmware
5032-8IOLM12P5DR 8 IO Link Channel, 8 Configurable Channel, 5Pin
Power, M12 Master Module with 2.011 or later firmware.
1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector
42AF Long Range General Purpose Sensor
42EF RightSight General Purpose Sensor
42JT Visi Sight Sensor
45CRM Color Registration Mark Sensor
45DMS Distance Measurement Sensor
46CLR ColorSight True Color Sensor
836P Solid-State Pressure Sensor
837T Solid-State Temperature Sensor
856T Control Tower Stack Light
871C Mini Tubular Sensor
871FM Mini Flat Pack Sensor
871TM Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor
873P Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor
875L Capacitive Sensor
46DFA Small Aperture Fiber-Optic Amplifier
45PLA Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor
This publication contains the following new or updated information. This list
includes substantive updates only and is not intended to reflect all changes.
Topic
Added 5032 IO-Link Master support
Footprint
Page
all
Each instruction requires memory footprint within the Logix controller. The
following characteristics apply:
•
•
•
Definition: Estimated memory required to store the object definition,
including all dependents
Instance: Estimated memory required per object instantiated.
Execution (L85E): Estimated execution time / scan footprint evaluated
in 1756-L85E PAC
Device Object Footprint
Device Object
raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster
raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster
raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032
raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL
28
Definition (kB)
28.14
29.5
33.088
77.612
81.628
70.86
71.508
65.384
66.328
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Instance (kB)
Execution (µs)
4.552
52
9.648
61
10.388
30
7.76
58
7.848
69
8.88
55
8.88
57
8.864
56
7.264
96
Rockwell Automation® IO-Link Device Library
Device Object Footprint
Device Object
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032
raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032
raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032
raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL
raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032
raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL
raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL
raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL
raC_Dvc_856T_5032
raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL
raC_Dvc_871C_5032
raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032
raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL
raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL
raC_Dvc_1694_5032
raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL
raC_Dvc_875L_5032
raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL
Definition (kB)
68.808
60.364
60.404
60.484
66.612
68.912
61.012
58.628
61.136
67.784
69.576
64.84
113.684
115.652
100.88
100.964
173.884
185.268
140.42
127.376
132.376
103.332
110.64
107.56
113.472
82.148
89.956
172.500
174.476
179.052
54.412
55.532
47.1
56.4
59.808
53.7
53.7
57.26
59.136
44.9
109.148
112.428
94.092
91.268
104.256
106.684
114.508
149.48
151.832
154.1
93.828
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Instance (kB)
Execution (µs)
7.352
96
7.568
56
7.568
58
7.576
59
8.156
94
8.244
97
9.376
50
7.712
49
7.72
52
7.368
86
7.444
92
7
45
11.168
81
11.256
88
10.576
63
14.688
65
15.42
112
17.42
118
9.088
100
10.512
110
10.6
132
9.936
70
9.968
75
9.52
104
9.608
120
8.952
55
8.984
58
19.552
92
20.532
98
16.888
90
5.92
85
7.048
82
6.376
65
6.696
84
6.784
92
7.008
40
7.008
40
7.688
79
7.756
84
4.988
35
9.084
97
9.26
105
10.216
60
10.208
64
9.172
95
9.26
98
10.26
70
23.496
74
23.672
88
18.52
90
17.944
21
29
Rockwell Automation® IO-Link Device Library
Device Object Footprint
Device Object
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032
raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL
raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032
Additional Resources
Definition (kB)
97.56
99.492
96.66
101.08
102.08
Instance (kB)
Execution (µs)
19.216
49
11.984
60
16.512
45
16.6
121
10
70
These documents contain additional information concerning related products
from Rockwell Automation®.
Resource
Description
Describes
the Add-On Instructions, PlantPAx instructions, and associated faceplates that
Rockwell Automation® Library of Process Objects Reference Manual PROCES-RM200
are available to develop applications.
1732E 8IOL IO-Link Master Module User Manual 1732E-UM007B
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
1734 4IOL IO-Link Master User Manual 1734-UM020B
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
5032 8IOL IO-Link Master Module User Manual 5032-UM001B
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
42AF RightSight Photoelectric Sensors User Manual 42AF-UM001A
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
42EF RightSight Photoelectric Sensors User Manual 42EF-UM001A
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
42JT VisiSight Photoelectric Sensors User Manual 42JT-UM001B
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
Provides quick reference information about feature, IO-Link parameter definition, Teach
45CRM Color Registration Mark Sensors Quick Reference 45CRM-QR001A
Procedure.
Provides quick reference information about feature, IO-Link parameter definition, Teach
46CLR ColorSight IO-Link Quick Reference 46CLR-QR001C
Procedure.
836P Solid-state Pressure Switches User Manual 836P-UM001A
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
837T Solid-state Temperature User Manual 837T-UM001A
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
856T Control Tower IO-Link Class B Light and Sound Module Controller User Manual
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
856T-UM001C
871C Miniature Inductive Sensors User Manual 871C-UM001A
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
871FM Miniature Metal Flat Pack Inductive Sensors User Manual 871FM-UM002A
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
871TM Long-range Inductive Sensors User Manual 871TM-UM002D
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
873P Ultrasonic Sensors User Manual 873P-UM001B
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
1694 Electronic Circuit Protection Module Installation Instructions 1694-IN001
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
1732IL ArmorBlock 16-Channel IO-Link Hub User Manual 1732IL-UM001D
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
875L Capacitive Sensors User Manual 875-UM001B
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
46DFA Small Aperture Fiber Optic Amplifier 46DFA-QR001A
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
45PLA Polarized Light Array Sensors 45PLA-QR001A
Provides installation instructions, wiring diagrams, configuration, and specifications.
Application Code Manager User Manual LOGIX-UM003
Studio 5000® Application Code Manager user manual.
30
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
2
Library Components
The IO-Link Device Library is a tested, documented, and life cycle managed
object library. The Device Library provides pre-configured status and
diagnostic faceplates and AOI sets for Allen-Bradley IO-Link Sensors and IOLink Master Modules. The IO-Link Device Objects may be used with Machine
Builder, Process, and Packaged Libraries or as standalone components. IOLink Device Library add-on instructions objects collect, process, and deliver
data between hardware devices and application logic.
IO-Link Device Instructions
The IO-Link Device Library includes instructions to interface with IO-Link
Sensors and IO-Link Master Modules. Each sensor instruction is provided
with variations for use with each master module. For example the 42AF Sensor
has instructions raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL for use with the 1734-4IOL POINT I/O 4Channel IO-Link Master Module, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL for use with the 1732E8IOLM12R ArmorBlock 8-Channel IO-Link Master Module and
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032 for use with the 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A, 50328IOLM12DR, 5032-8IOLM12P5DR 8-Channel IO-Link Master Module.The
master module instructions and faceplates are optional for module
diagnostics and device summary but can be used independently from the
sensor instructions and faceplates.
The instructions included are as follows:
IO-Link Master Modules:
•
•
•
•
•
1732E-8IOLM12R ArmorBlock 8-Channel IO-Link Master Module
1734-4IOL/K POINT I/O 4-Channel IO-Link Master Module
5032-8IOLM12DR 8-Channel IO-Link Master Module
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR 8-Channel IO-Link Master Module
5032-8IOLM12P5DR 8-Channel IO-Link Master Module
IO-Link Sensors:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
42AF Long Range General Purpose Sensor
42EF RightSight General Purpose Sensor
42JT Visi Sight Sensor
45CRM Color Registration Mark Sensor
46CLR ColorSight True Color Sensor
871C Mini Tubular Sensor
871FM Mini Flat Pack Sensor
871TM Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor
1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector
45DMS Distance Measurement Sensor
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
31
Chapter 2
Library Components
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
836P Solid-State Pressure Sensor
837T Solid-State Temperature Sensor
856T Control Tower Stack Light
873P Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor
875L Capacitive Sensor
46DFA Small Aperture Fiber-Optic Amplifier Sensor
45PLA Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor
There is one type of instruction in this library:
•
Device (Dvc): instruction used for devices (e.g. 42AF Sensor).
IO-Link Device Instructions
Instruction
raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster
raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster
raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032
raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032
raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032
raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032
raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL
raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032
raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL
raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL
32
Compatible Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
Version
3.02
3.02
Category
IO-Link Master
IO-Link Master
Instruction Description
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL 4-Channel IO-Link Master Module
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R 8-Channel IO-Link Master Module
3.02
IO-Link Master
5032 8-Channel IO-Link Master Module
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
42AF Long Range General Purpose Sensor
42AF Long Range General Purpose Sensor
42AF Long Range General Purpose Sensor
42AF Long Range General Purpose Sensor
42AF Long Range General Purpose Sensor
42EF RightSight General Purpose Sensor
42EF RightSight General Purpose Sensor
42EF RightSight General Purpose Sensor
42EF RightSight General Purpose Sensor
42EF RightSight General Purpose Sensor
42JT Visi Sight Sensor
42JT Visi Sight Sensor
42JT Visi Sight Sensor
42JT Visi Sight Sensor
42JT Visi Sight Sensor
45C CRM Color Registration Mark Sensor
45CRM Color Registration Mark Sensor
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
45CRM Color Registration Mark Sensor
3.02
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
45DMS Distance Measurement Sensor
45DMS Distance Measurement Sensor
45DMS Distance Measurement Sensor
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
45DMS Distance Measurement Sensor
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
46CLR ColorSight True Color Sensor
46CLR ColorSight True Color Sensor
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
46CLR ColorSight True Color Sensor
3.02
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
836P Solid-state pressure sensors
836P Solid-state pressure sensors 755
836P Solid-state pressure sensors 755
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
836P Solid-state pressure sensors 755
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
827T Solid-state temperature sensors
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 2
Library Components
IO-Link Device Instructions
Instruction
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL
raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL
raC_Dvc_856T_5032
raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL
raC_Dvc_871C_5032
raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032
raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL
raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL
raC_Dvc_1694_5032
raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL
raC_Dvc_875L_5032
raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032
raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL
raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032
Compatible Master
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR Or
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Or
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Library Folders and Files
Version
3.02
3.02
Category
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
Instruction Description
837T Solid-state temperature sensors
837T Solid-state temperature sensors
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
837T Solid-state temperature sensors
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
856T Control Tower Stack Light
856T Control Tower Stack Light
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
856T Control Tower Stack Light
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
871C Mini Tubular Sensor
871C Mini Tubular Sensor
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
871C Mini Tubular Sensor
3.02
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
871FM Mini Flat Pack Sensor
871FM Mini Flat Pack Sensor
871FM Mini Flat Pack Sensor
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
871FM Mini Flat Pack Sensor
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
871TM Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor
871TM Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
871TM Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor
3.02
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
873P Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensors
873P Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensors
873P Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensors
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
873P Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensors
3.02
3.02
IO-Link ECP
IO-Link ECP
1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protectors
1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protectors
3.02
IO-Link ECP
1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protectors
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
875L Capacitive Sensors
875L Capacitive Sensors
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
875L Capacitive Sensors
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
46DFA Small Aperture Fiber Optic Amplifier Sensors
46DFA Small Aperture Fiber Optic Amplifier Sensors
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
46DFA Small Aperture Fiber Optic Amplifier Sensors
3.02
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
IO-Link Sensor
45PLA Polarized Light Array Sensors
45PLA Polarized Light Array Sensors
3.02
IO-Link Sensor
45PLA Polarized Light Array Sensors
When you extract the library from the downloaded .zip folder, you will find the
following folder and file structure. Note that some items are generalized with
TYPE (e.g. Dvc, Opr, Tec) and OBJECT (e.g. 45DMS, 46CLR, etc). The major and
minor versions are represented by X and Y respectively.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
33
Chapter 2
Library Components
Level 1
Application Example
Level 2
Level 3
File Type
IOLinkApplication_ACM_v3_02.xlsx
XLXS
ApplicationCode ManagerProject
IOLinkApplication_v3_02.ACD
ACD
Logix Designer Example Project
IOLinkApplication_ME_v3_02.apa
APA
FT View ME Project Archive
IOLinkApplication_SE_v3_02.apa
APA
FT View SE Project Archive
IOLinkApplication_VD_3_02.vpd
VPD
View Designer Project File
Folder
Application Code Manager files
Folder
ACM Object Attachments
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries
Attachments (.HZ1 and .txt files)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_GROUP_raC_Dvc_OBJECT_(X.Y).HSL4
HSL4
ACM Asset-Control Object
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_GROUP_raC_Dvc_OBJECT_(X.Y).HSL4
HSL4
ACM Device Object
Folder
FactoryTalk View ME files
Folder
FT View ME display files
HMI - FactoryTalk View ME
Displays - gfx
(raC-X_YY-ME) raC_TYPE_OBJECT-faceplate.gfx GFX
Global Objects - ggfx
Object Faceplate display
Folder
FT View ME Global Object files
(raC-X-ME) Graphic Symbols - LIBRARY.ggfx
GGFX
Graphic Symbol/Launch Button
global objects
(raC-X-ME) Toolbox - LIBRARY.ggfx
GGFX
Toolbox global objects
Folder
FactoryTalk View SE files
Folder
FT View SE display files
HMI - FactoryTalk View SE
Displays - gfx
(raC-X_YY-SE) raC_TYPE_OBJECT-faceplate.gfx GFX
Global Objects - ggfx
Object Faceplate display
Folder
FT View SE Global Object files
(raC-X-SE) Graphic Symbols - LIBRARY.ggfx
GGFX
Graphic Symbol/Launch Button
global objects
(raC-X-SE) Toolbox - LIBRARY.ggfx
GGFX
Toolbox global objects
Folder
View Designer Files
(raC-X_YY-VD) raC_Dvc_IO-Link.vpd
VPD
raC_Dvc_1732IL_Hubs.vpd
VPD
Object faceplate and graphic
symbol/launch buttons
Object faceplate and graphic
symbol/launch buttons
Folder
FT View ME/SE image files
HMI - ViewDesigner - vpd
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png
images.png
Reference Manuals
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
PNG
FTView ME/SE images
Folder
Manuals
PDF
Reference manual
Folder
Studio 5000 AOI and RUNG
import files
raC_TYPE_OBJECT_X.YY_RUNG.L5X
L5X
Object rung import
raC_TYPE_OBJECT_X.YY_AOI.L5X
L5X
Object AOI import
Folder
How-to and Operational
Overview Videos
How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_FTViewME.mp4
MP4
How-to Video
How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_LogixDesigner.mp4
MP4
How-to Video
How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_LogixDesigner (5032 Master).mp4
MP4
How-to Video
How_To_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_ViewDesigner.mp4
MP4
How-to Video
How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_ACM.mp4
MP4
How-to Video
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Files L5X
Videos
34
Description
How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_ACM (5032 Master).mp4
MP4
How-to Video
Operational_Overview_of_TYPE_Objects_Faceplate.mp4
MP4
Operational Overview video
Operational_Overview_of_TYPE_Objects_Faceplate (5032 Master).mp4
MP4
Operational Overview video
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 2
Library Components
FTViewStudio_IOLinkLibrary_Tags_3_00.CSV
CSV
ReadMe.txt
TXT
Explanation of setup.cmd
CMD
Application Code Manager setup
script to register library
Setup.cmd
FTView ME HMI Tags
See the files in the Application Example folder to see a functional application that
uses all of the IO-Link Device Library instructions. These files are referenced in the
Programming Examples for each instruction. The files include a Studio 5000 Logix
Designer® controller file, a Studio 5000® Application Code Manager project back-up,
and an HMI projects for FactoryTalk® View ME/SE Local Station and Studio 5000 View
Designer®.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
35
Chapter 2
Library Components
Visualization Files
Each Add-On Instruction has associated visualization files that provide a
common user interface. The IO-Link Device Library supports two HMI options
each with their own files supplied:
•
•
•
FactoryTalk® View Machine Edition
FactoryTalk® View Site Edition
Studio 5000 View Designer®
FactoryTalk View Visualization Files
You must import these files in the following order:
•
•
•
Images (.png files)
Global Objects(.ggfx file type)
HMI faceplates (.gfx file type)
File Type Abbreviations
FactoryTalk View SE
FactoryTalk View ME
Description
All .png files in the HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png folder.
icons that are used in the Global
Images (.png)
IMPORTANT: FactoryTalk View application renames PNG files when they are imported with a .bmp file Common
Objects and standard displays for all objects.
extension, but the files retain a .png format.
Graphic Symbols - IO-Link
Graphic symbols or launch buttons used to
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx (raC-3-ME)
Device.ggfx
open faceplate displays from other displays.
Global objects (.ggfx)
Common
objects used across multiple device
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
faceplates.
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_45DMSStandard displays (.gfx) (raC-3_XX-SE) precedes name of the display.
(raC-3_XX-ME) precedes name of the display. e.g.
Faceplate.gfx
Global object files contain Graphic Symbols that are created once and
referenced multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When
changes are made to a global object, all instances in the application are
automatically updated.
Global objects serve two purposes:
•
•
Toolbox files contain common elements that are used to build faceplate
displays.
Graphic Symbols files contain device symbols or launch buttons that
you can use to build your application displays. Select the symbol to
open the corresponding faceplate display.
Standard display files, commonly called faceplates, provide a common user
interface.
Studio 5000 View Designer Visualization Files
View Designer project files are supplied that contain faceplates and launch
buttons for the IO-Link Device Library. The devices are distributed over
multiple View Designer Project files grouped by category for PowerDiscrete,
PowerVelocity, PowerMotion, and PowerMonitor devices. These files are
found in the HMI - ViewDesigner - vpd folder. Inside of the VPD file you will find
a the required display files inside of the User-Defined Screens folder.
36
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 2
Display Type
View Designer Screen
Screen
Toolbox
Pop-Up
raC_Dvc_ precedes name of the pop-up.
Basic Faceplate Attributes
Library Components
Description
Graphic symbols or launch buttons used to open faceplate/pop-up displays from other
displays.
Faceplate display for specific device. e.g. raC_Dvc_45DMS_FP
Faceplates consist of tabs, and each tab consists of one or more pages. The
Home tab is displayed when the faceplate is initially opened. The faceplate
provides the means for operators, maintenance personnel, engineers, and
others to interact with a device or instruction instance, which includes a view
of its status and values. Faceplates may also manipulate an instruction through
its commands and settings. Select the appropriate icon on the left of the
faceplate to access a specific tab. This section provides an overview of the
faceplate attributes that are common across the objects. More details are
supplied in the individual section for each object.
Common Status Banner
At the top of all device object faceplates there is a common status banner which
provides the following information:
•
•
•
Ready (green LED icon) or Not Ready (yellow LED icon) status
Faulted (banner will show Not Ready with fault message)
Communication Loss
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
4
4
Description
Ready state displays green LED icon and grey background.
Faulted state shows yellow LED icon and Not Ready status.
Fault message for latest fault present. Will also display “Virtual” if virtual mode is enabled.
Faulted state shows yellow border around banner.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
37
Chapter 2
Library Components
Faceplate Navigation
All device object faceplates have navigation tabs on the left side of the
faceplate. Navigation tabs may vary based on device type. The active tab will
show as a light grey, while an inactive tab will show as a dark grey.
Active Tab
Inactive Tab
The common tabs are shown below.
Home Tab
Health Tab
Trend Tab
Fault Tab
Configuration Tab
Faceplate Revision Notes
By clicking on the open space near the bottom left corner of the faceplate you
can momentarily view revision notes and details of the active faceplate. This
may be useful in troubleshooting or when communicating with Rockwell
Automation Tech Support.
2
3
1
Item
1
2
3
38
Description
Click near the bottom right corner to temporarily open up the revision notes dialogue
Revision number
Faceplate display name
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 2
Launch Buttons
Library Components
Launch buttons are provided in Global Display (GGFX) files for FactoryTalk
View® ME/SE projects. There are two types of launch buttons are provided,
shown in below Table. These are used to open HMI faceplate displays or popups.
Launch Button
Style
Image Examples
Usage
Basic Text
Button
Simple launch button with diagnostic
information.
Graphical
Button
Graphic button can be used in
schematic style displays where a
system/network diagram is shown.
When available, basic module
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed.
Diagnostic Icons
Diagnostic icons may be displayed on the graphic buttons for compatible
modules. Safety modules are designated with a small guard icon.
Icon
Image
Visible Condition
Communications Failure
Connection Faulted
Fault
Any device fault active
(module hardware issue)
Warning
Any device warning
active (maintenance
required)
Not Ready
Device Not Ready
IO-Link Identification
Always Visible
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
39
Chapter 2
Library Components
1
2
5
3
6
4
Item
Description
Options
1 Device label. Set to tag.@Description by default. Set to Global Parameter #104 for custom label.
Device Fault/Warning Status
2
Warning
Fault
Device communication failure/Virtual Mode status
3
40
Communication Failure
4
- 42AF, 42EF, 42JT, 45PLA, 45CRM, 46CLR, 46DFA, 871C, 871FM, 871TM, 875L:
Triggered/Not Triggered Status
Device live data variable - 45DMS, 873P: Distance (mm)
- 836P: Pressure (Units as per Configuration)
- 837T: Temperature (Units as per Configuration)
- 856T, 1694, IO-Link Master: Not Applicable
5
IO-Link Identification
6
Device not ready status
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 2
Library Versions
Library Components
Each library object has a revision x.yy where: x is the Major Revision number
and yy is the Minor Revision number. Each release of the library comes with
release notes that describe the changes that were made since the last release.
You can find the revision number of the object in a number of locations as
shown below.
Component
Example
The Add-On Instruction in Logix Designer
applicationhasrevisioninformationvisible
when the instruction is selected in the
Controller Organizer.
The Add-On Instruction Definition General
tab shows the revision number along with
basic revision notes. Refer to the release
notes for complete revision notes.
The faceplate in FactoryTalk View
software has revision information visible
when the pointer is clicked just inside the
lower left corner of the faceplate.
The revision number is shown in the file
names for GFX, VPD, ACM.HSL4, AOI.L5X,
and RUNG.L5X files.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
41
Chapter 2
Library Components
State Model
The following section will discuss the state model for Device Object. The figure
below shows the core logic states.
By default, each state is active for a minimum of 256us to allow for evaluation
of state outside of the ADO instance in the user program
Interfaces
Device object interfaces are intended to provide the application programmer a
class based harmonized interface for interacting with the device object from
user code. Standard control interfaces are used for passing device inputs (Inp),
device configuration (Cfg), Settings (Set), Commands (Cmd) and Status (Sts).
The following IO-Link Common Control Interface tags are the primary device
program tags to read and write to when interfacing to IO-Link devices. The
value of using these tags in your specific application code is that you may use a
number of different IO-Link devices such as 42AF, 45DMS, etc without having
to update your application device interface tags.
For detailed information on specific interfaces, please refer to the appropriate
section in this manual. A list of interface UDTs used in this library follows.
Note that OBJECT used in the Inp interfaces is replaced with the specific IOLink sensor device object (e.g. 42AF).
42
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 2
Interface Class
Object Class
Object Sub-Class
IO-Link Devices
Control
IO-Link
IO-Link Master
IO-Link Device
Data Types
Interface Type
Setting
Command
Status
Information
Information
Interfacing
Config
Config
Information
Input
Input
Input
Config
Library Components
Interface Name (UDT)
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
raC_UDT_ItfAD_4IOL_Master_Cfg
raC_UDT_ItfAD_8IOL_Master_Cfg
raC_UDT_IOLinkMaster_5032_Diag_Assembly
raC_UDT_ItfAD_OBJECT_Inp_4IOL
raC_UDT_ItfAD_OBJECT_Inp_8IOL
raC_UDT_ItfAD_OBJECT_Inp_5032
raC_UDT_IOLink_OBJECT_Cfg
The following IO-Link Common Control Interface tags are the primary device
program tags to read and write to when interfacing to IO-Link devices. The
value of using these tags in your specific application code is that you may use a
number of different IO-Link devices such as 42EF, 45DMS, etc without having
to update your application device interface tags.
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
This is the IO-Link Sensor Common Control Interface User-Defined Data Type
for device settings. Its members provide application program access to allow
or inhibit commands and settings from the device faceplate or other external
sources. The table below shows member names, descriptions, and tag data
types.
For example, to inhibit write commands from the device faceplate or other
external sources write a 1 to the _InstanceName_CtlrSet.InhibitCmd program
tag from your application program. This would prevent a Locate, Reset count,
Reset Duration commands from the device faceplate.
Member
Description
Data Type
InhibitCmd
1 = Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate, 0 = Allow Control
BOOL
InhibitSet
1 = Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate, 0 = Allow
BOOL
InhibitCfg
1 = Inhibit user Configuration parameters from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow BOOL
Setpoint
Trigger Setpoint
INT
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
This is the IO-Link Sensor Common Control Interface User-Defined Data Type
for device commands. Its members provide application program access to
common device commands.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
43
Chapter 2
Library Components
Only write to these common command members to control the device. If you
write directly to the device’s output command tags directly unexpected device
operation could occur.
The table below shows member names, descriptions, and tag data types. Note:
Physical & Virtual members are not currently used in the Add-On Instruction
and are reserved for future use.
Member
Description
DataType
bCmd
Bir Overlay (Visible) covering all subsequent boolean members.
INT
ResetWarn
Reset device warning [No warning reset]
BOOL
ResetFault
Reset device trip or fault[No Fault reset,- Automatic fault reset only] BOOL
ResetCounter
Reset counter value [1=Reset]
BOOL
Locate
Flash sensor LEDs [1=flash]
BOOL
Physical
Operate as a physical device
BOOL
Virtual
Virtual mode not implemented
BOOL
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
This is the IO-Link Sensor Common Control interfacing Status tag. By
configuring these tags, we can read various status from the device like Ready,
Connected, and Available etc. The below table shows detailed information of
members used in this UDT tags. Note: Physical & Virtual members are not
currently used in the Add-On Instruction and are reserved for future use.
44
Input
Description
Data Type
eState
Enumerated state value:
0 = Unused
1 = Initializing
2 = Disconnected
3 = Disconnecting
4 = Connecting
5 = Idle
6 = Configuring
7 = Available
DINT
FirstWarning
First Warning Event Data
raC_UDT_Event
FirstFault
First Fault Event Data
raC_UDT_Event
eCmdFail
Not Applicable
DINT
bSts
Enumerated state value
0 = Connected
1 = Available
2 = Warning
3 = Faulted
4 = Ready
5 = Active
DINT
Connected
1 = PAC to device connection has been established
BOOL
Available
1 = The device is available for interaction with the user program BOOL
Warning
1 = A warning is active on the device
BOOL
Faulted
1 = A fault is active on the device
BOOL
Physical
1 = Operating as a physical device
BOOL
Virtual
1 = Operating as a virtual device[Not an output device]
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 2
Library Components
Input
Description
Data Type
Counter
Displays the sensor counter value when enabled
DINT
Data
Primary sensor data value
REAL
EU
Data Engineering Unit
STR0020
Triggered
Bitwise Sensor Trigger Status
INT
Signal_Strength
0-65535 Signal strength value reflected by the target
DINT
AppSensorName
Application Specific Name
STR0032
The Triggered INT value is a bitwise representation of the sensors triggered
status bits. The number of trigger statuses may vary depending on the sensor
type up to 16 statuses. You may reference individual bits by using syntax such as
Triggered.0 to Triggered.15 for the sensor's connected Trigger no.1 and so on up
to 16 triggers respectively.
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
This is the IO-Link Device/Sensor interfacing data which provide the
command and status related information to the IO-Link Master. The members
inside are array of 8 elements. First element of array describe the Sensor status
& command data which is connected to Channel ‘0’ of Master.
The below table shows detailed information of members used in this UDT tag.
Member
Description
Data Type
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts[8]
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd[8]
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorInf
This is the IO-Link Device/Sensor interfacing data which provide the Sensor
type information to the IO-Link Master. The members inside are array of 8
elements.
The below table shows detailed information of members used in this UDT tag.
Member
Description
Data Type
bTriggerPresent
Bitwise Trigger Availability Status
INT[8]
bDataInfo
Bitwise Data Information Availability Status
(0 = Data, 1 = Signal Strength, 2 = Counter, 3 = Locate, 4 = ASN)
SINT[8]
bEnable
IO-Link Sensor present on respective channel
e.g. bEnable.0 = 1: IO-Link Sensor present on channel 0
DINT
Inf_Lib
Library identifier for HMI navigation
STR0032[8]
Inf_Type
Type identifier for HMI navigation
STR0032[8]
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorInf_5032
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
45
Chapter 2
Library Components
This is the IO-Link Device/Sensor interfacing data which provide the Sensor
type information to the 5032 IO-Link Master. The members inside are array of
7 elements.
The below table shows detailed information of members used in this UDT tag.
Member
Description
Data Type
bTriggerPresent
Bitwise Trigger Availability Status
INT[8]
bDataInfo
Bitwise Data Information Availability Status
(0 = Data, 1 = Signal Strength, 2 = Counter, 3 = Locate, 4 = ASN)
SINT[8]
bEnable
IO-Link Sensor present on respective channel
e.g. bEnable.0 = 1: IO-Link Sensor present on channel 0
DINT
Inf_Lib
Library identifier for HMI navigation
STR0032[8]
Inf_Type
Type identifier for HMI navigation
STR0032[8]
bDisconnect
IO-Link Sensor Connection fault Status
e.g. bDissconnect.0 = 1: IO-Link Sensor not connected.
IO-Link Sensor fault present on respective channel
e.g. bFault.0 = 1: IO-Link Sensor fault present on channel 0
DINT
bFault
DINT
raC_UDT_Event
Member
Description
Data Type
Type
Event type:
1 = Status
2 = Warning
3 = Fault
4...n = User
DINT
ID
User definable event ID.
DINT
Category
Userdefinablecategory (Electrical,Mechanical,Materials,Utility,etc.). DINT
Action
User definable event action code.
DINT
Value
User definable event value or fault code.
DINT
Message
Event message text.
STRING
EventTime_L
Timestamp (Date/Time format).
LINT
EventTime_D
Timestamp (Y,M,D,h,m,s,us).
DINT[7]
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082
Member
Description
Data Type
Code
Stores the value of device fault code
DINT
Desc
Stores the Messages related to fault code
STRING
raC_UDT_Dropdown
This is the IO-Link Sensor Common Control Interface User-Defined Data Type
for dropdown.
46
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 2
Library Components
The below table shows detailed information of members used in this UDT tag.
Input
Description
Data Type
Slider_Min
Slider Minimum
SINT
Slider_Max
Slider Maximum
SINT
Total_Item_Count
Total Length of Dropdown
SINT
List_Shift
Slider Value for Total Length of Dropdown
SINT
List_Select
Slider Value for Visible rows of Dropdown
SINT
Selected
Slider Value as per Total Count of Dropdown
SINT
Selected_Item
Selected Item from Dropdown
INT
Animation_Active
Dropdown List Visible
INT
Set_Up
Slider Up Command
BOOL
Set_Down
Slider Down Command
BOOL
Trigger_Tag
After Selection Trigger Bit
BOOL
List_Display
Dropdown List Item
STR0020[5]
List_Item
Enter Dropdown item names. e.g. Option0, Option1...etc STR0020[16]
raC_UDT_HEX_Code_LookupMember
Application Code Manager
Member
Description
Data Type
Time_Base
Time Base Selection: 0.1, 0.4, 1.6 & 6.4
REAL
Multiplier
Multiplier Number: 0 to 63
SINT
Hex_Code
Hex Code
INT
Architectural Overview
Device libraries, as with most Application Code Libraries are divided into 2
logical groups: either Asset-Control Object or Device Implement Object.
Asset-Control Objects contain the asset definition of an object and any
associated content which belongs to the asset. This includes controller tags,
add-on instructions, data types, and attachments such as HMI content and
documentation. These are found under the (RA-LIB) Device > Asset-Control
folder and have names like raC_Dvc_xxxx where xxxx is the device name.
Device Implement Objects contain an instance of an asset-control object and
provide all related configuration of the asset. The Device implement type is the
application code (e.g. programming rung). This includes the required
controller tags, programs, modules, and FactoryTalk View ME/SE symbols.
These are found under the (RA-LIB) Device > Device folder and have names like
raC_LD_Dvc_xxxx where xxxx is the device name. LD stands for ladder logic.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
47
Chapter 2
48
Library Components
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
3
Using the Library
Install the Library
Download the Library
For the latest compatible software information and to download the Rockwell
Automation Library, see the Product Compatibility and Download Center.
Search “Device Library” or filter on Application Content to quickly find the
library.
Download & Install Studio 5000® Application Code Manager
Studio 5000® Application Code Manager is free to install from Rockwell
Automation’s Product Compatibility and Download Center.
Search “Application Code Manager” and select the item to download.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
49
Using the Library
Extract the downloaded .zip file by running the 4.xx.00-Studio5000_ACMDVD.exe executable file. This will extract a new folder containing a Setup.exe file
which can be run to begin product installation.
Follow the prompts from the splash screen until installation is complete. Note
that a SQL server is required for Application Code Manager. SQL Server
Express is offered for free and is included in the Application Code Manager
installer.
Register Libraries in Studio 5000® Application Code Manager
It is recommended that you use Studio 5000® Application Code Manager or
the Studio 5000® “Import Library Objects” Plug-In Wizard to import device
library objects into a Logix 5000 controller project. To use the library in
Application Code Manager you must first register the libraries.
Using Studio 5000® Application Code Manager is not mandatory although it is highly
recommended to reduce the likelihood of configuration errors and simplify the
workflow. Alternatively, you can import the RUNG.L5X files directly into a Studio
5000® project.
The Lite version of Studio 5000® Application Code Manager is free of charge and can
be downloaded from the Product Compatibility and Download Centre. None of the
features included in the Standard (paid) version are required to use Device Object
Libraries.
Register Complete Library Automatically
50
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
To automatically register the entire library, find and run the setup.cmd file in
the root folder of the library files. You will see a windows console appear as the
script runs. When it is complete it will display “Deployment Complete”. Enter
“Y” to exist the console.
Register Individual Library Objects Manually
As an alternative to registering the entire library using the setup.cmd script,
you can manually register one or multiple library objects in Studio 5000®
Application Code Manager. Open up Application Code Manager and view the
Registered Libraries panel on the right. Right-click on Registered Libraries and
select Register. Browse to the ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries folder within the
library files and select any HSL4 files that you would like to register. Note you
may select more than one at a time. Once you complete registering the desired
objects they will be shown under the (RA-LIB) Device solution folder.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
51
Using the Library
Importing Logic into Studio
5000® Projects
There are multiple methods to using the logic in a Studio 5000 application. For
projects that are being developed from scratch using Application Code
Manager along with other Application Code Libraries such as the PlantPAx
Process Objects Library or the Machine Builder Library, you can continue to
use the Device Object Libraries in Application Code Manager. For existing
applications where devices are being added, it is recommended to use the
Studio 5000 Plug-In “Import Library Objects” Wizard. Alternatively you can
import the RUNG.L5X files into your program and configure them manually.
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“How_To_Import_and_Configure_IO-Link_Device_Objects_in_LogixDesigner.mp4”
It is not recommended to simply import the AOI.L5X files and attempt to build your
own logic rung. Doing so will increase the likelihood of configuration errors and likely
miss logic that is required outside of the Add-On Instruction.
AOI files should only be imported when updating an existing application from a
previous version of a Device Object Library to a newer one.
Below is a table to capture recommendations on when to use which tool or
workflow when importing and configuring device objects.
Tool/Workflow
Application Code Manager
(full application)
Studio 5000 Plug-In “Import
Library Objects” Wizard
Import RUNG.L5X File
Import AOI.L5X File
Description of when to use
Software Requirements
Project is developped from scratch using Studio 5000 Logix Designer®
Application Code Manager along with
Studio 5000® Application Code Manager
PlantPAx or Machine Builder libraries. (Lite)
Application Code Manager is installed but
not required for the entire project.
Studio 5000 Logix Designer®
Application has already been developed Studio 5000® Application Code Manager
but some Device Objects need to be
(Lite)
added.
Application Code Manager is not installed.
Application has already been developed
but some Device Objects need to be
Studio 5000 Logix Designer®
added.
Familiar with rung import workflow.
Updating existing application that
contains an older version of a Device Studio 5000 Logix Designer®
Object AOI.
Import Library Objects Wizard
The most simple way to import a Device Object into an existing application is
to use the Studio 5000 Plug-In “Import Library Objects” wizard. This plug-in
requires Application Code Manager to be installed but does not require it to be
open or have a project created.
Right click on an item (e.g. Controller, Task, Program, etc) in the Controller
Organizer and select Plug-Ins > Import Library Objects...
52
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
This will launch a small wizard version of Application Code Manager inside of
your Studio 5000 Logix Designer® Project. In the Registered Libraries panel on
the left, find your desired object under Registered Libraries > (RA-LIB) Device >
Device, then follow below steps:
-Add IO-Link Master H/W Module Object.
-Add desired IO-Link sensor AOI Objects.
-Add IO-Link Master AOI Object.
Perform the following configuration:
•
Enter a name and description. Maximum name length can be 22
characters. Note that other parameters such as the RoutineName,
TagName, etc will auto-complete based on these fields.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
53
Using the Library
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Assign the Task and Program.
Assign the Master Reference by typing or browsing to the instance of
the IO-Link Master Module in the controller project (e.g. 1734-4IOL,
1732E-8IOLM12R or 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A)
Enter the Module Name as per Sensor used in Application.
Select the Sensor Type as per IODD used in Application (i.e. Type1,
Type2 Or Type3).
Select a ChannelNumber which is the IO-Link Master Module channel
which the IO-Link sensor or device is connected to.
The HMI Configuration options are not used in the Plug-In Wizard and
can be ignored.
Click next or click on the Linked Libraries tab. Click the Auto Create
button to automatically create all of the required linked libraries.
You can manually create new linked libraries or point to existing linked libraries if
necessary. You may need to do this if you would like to use an older version of library
objects when multiple versions are installed in Application Code Manager.
•
•
•
On the following screen you can select the desired Merge Actions.
Generally these can be left with the default actions.
• Add: used when AOIs don’t previously exist in application
• Overwrite: usually preferred. Used when AOIs previously exist but
may or may not be the same revision.
• Use Existing: used when AOIs previously exist in the application and
you do not wish to overwrite the existing items.
Click next and you can now see any new logic and modules that will be
created.
Click Finish to complete the import.
Import Rung Logic (4IOL, 8IOL Masters)
An Add-On Instruction is defined once in each controller project, and can be
instantiated multiple times in your application code. To use pre-engineered
logic, import each desired RUNG.L5X file into a controller project.
1.
In the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application, open a new or
existing project.
IMPORTANT
Add-On Instruction definitions can be imported, but not updated, online.
2. Choose or create a new ladder routine to open. Right-click in the
routine ladder and choose Import Rungs...
54
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
3. Select the desired RUNG and Select Import. The file will have a name
like raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X.
.
Both “RUNG” and “AOI” .L5X files are provided. Import the RUNG
file to get all required additional tags, data types, and message
configurations.
4. An Import Configuration dialogue window will open and display generic
Import names which include “_InstanceName”. Click the Find/Replace...
button and replace all instances of “_InstanceName” with your desired
device name (e.g. “PhotoSensor101”).
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
55
Using the Library
5. Click the Find/Replace... button and replace of “Instance_Description”
with your desired description e.g. “Object Detection 101”).
56
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
6. Click the Find/Replace... button and replace of “_AdapterName” with
your desired Adapter Module Name e.g. “Rack01”).
7. Click the Find/Replace... button and replace of “_ModuleName” with
your desired IO-Link Master Module Name e.g.
(“PointIO_4IOL_Master”).
8. You will need to point the new object to the correct AdapterName
module in your project. You can type in or browse for the correct input
(:I) tags in your project. In this example our module is called Rack01:1:I
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
57
Using the Library
which is the 1734-4IOL module installed in slot 1 of a POINT I/O rack
called Rack01.
9. Click “OK” on the “Import Configuration dialog box”. The rung will now
be imported into your ladder routine.
58
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
10. Browse the tags and assign it to the input parameters of the imported
AOI Rung. For ‘Inp_ChNumber’ give the channel no. of Master where
sensor is connected.
Import Rung Logic (5032 Master)
An Add-On Instruction is defined once in each controller project, and can be
instantiated multiple times in your application code. To use pre-engineered
logic, import each desired RUNG.L5X file into a controller project.
1.
In the Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application, open a new or
existing project.
IMPORTANT
Add-On Instruction definitions can be imported, but not updated, online.
2. Choose or create a new ladder routine to open. Right-click in the
routine ladder and choose Import Rungs...
3. Select the desired RUNG and Select Import. The file will have a name
like raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
59
Using the Library
.
Both “RUNG” and “AOI” .L5X files are provided. Import the
RUNG file to get all required additional tags, data types, and
message configurations.
4. An Import Configuration dialogue window will open and display generic
Import names which include “_InstanceName”. Click the Find/Replace...
button and replace all instances of “_InstanceName” with your desired
device name (e.g. “Sensor_42EF_Type1”).
60
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
5. Click the Find/Replace... button and replace of “_Instance_Description”
with your desired description (e.g. “Object Detection 101”).
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
61
Using the Library
6. Click the Find/Replace... button and replace of “_MasterName” with your
desired 5032 IO-Link Master Module Name (e.g.
“Mod_Master_5032_1”).
7. Click the Find/Replace... button and replace of “_ModuleName” with
your desired IO-Link Sensor Module Name e.g.
(“Mod_42AF_Type1”).
62
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
8. Click “OK” on the “Import Configuration dialog box”. The rung will now
be imported into your ladder routine.
Using Studio 5000 View
Designer®
Using View Designer Project Files
Studio 5000 View Designer® may be used for HMI development for PanelView
5000 applications. Open up your Studio 5000 View Designer® project
alongside a second application instance running the required VSD file in the
library folder HMI - ViewDesigner - vpd.
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk stepby-step through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:“How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_LogixDesigner.mp4” and “How_To_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_ViewDesigner.mp4”
You will notice there are two screens available under the User-Defined Screens
folder:
•
•
Toolbox: This has the graphic symbol launch buttons for the faceplate.
raC_Dvc_xxxxx_FP: This is a faceplate pop-up screen.
To include these files in your project, perform the following steps:
•
•
Copy the entire faceplate _FP screen from the supplied View Designer
project to your project application.
Open the Toolbox screen and copy the desired graphic symbol and
paste it into a screen in your project application.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
63
Using the Library
Configuring View Designer Objects
To link the launch button to the faceplate, highlight the button and view the
Events tab of within the Properties pane. Set an Event to Open popup on release
with the following settings:
•
•
•
Using FactoryTalk® View
Studio
Key: Touch Release
Open Popup: Select desired faceplate screen
AOI_Tag (Property Configuration): Browse to AOI backing tag for the
device object in your controller file
Import FactoryTalk View Visualization Files
There are several components to import for the visualization files. You import
files from the downloaded Rockwell Automation library files via FactoryTalk
View ME/SE. All image and display items can be imported either by rightclicking in FactoryTalk View on the Graphic sub-folder (e.g. Displays, Global
Objects, Images) or simply dragging and dropping the files into the
application.
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk stepby-step through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section: “How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_LogixDesigner.mp4” and “How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_FTViewME.mp4”
64
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
Import files in this order:
1.
Import HMI Images files.
Select all the images in the \HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png folder
and Open.
2. Import Global Object files
Select the global object (.ggfx) files from the \HMI - FactoryTalk View
ME\Global Objects - ggfx folder
3. Import HMI Faceplates
Select the faceplate (.gfx) files from the \HMI - FactoryTalk View ME\Displays gfx folder
Configuring FactoryTalk View Objects
Once the files have been imported into the FactoryTalk View Studio project,
you can begin using them in your application. Open the Global Display (raC-3ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device. Copy the desired launch button style and
paste it into a display in your application where you would like to open the
faceplate. For more information on graphic symbols, refer to the Graphic
Symbols section of the specific device type chapter in this manual.
To configure the graphic symbol launch button, right-click and select Global
Object Parameter Values. The Global Object Parameter values for the Backing
Tag (#102) and Navigation Button Label (#104) are mandatory while the display
position values (#120, #121) are optional. You can browse for the tag in your
controller project by clicking ‘...’ or manually type them in. These parameters
may vary depending on the graphic symbol used, please refer to the Graphic
Symbols section of the device type for detailed information.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
65
Using the Library
• Launch Button Parameter Configuration e.g. (IO-Link Sensor Faceplate
Navigation).
• Launch Button Parameter Configuration e.g. (IO-Link Master Faceplate
Navigation).
These Global Object Parameter Values are automatically configured when you use
Studio 5000® Application Code Manager to design and configure your project. Refer
to Using Studio 5000® Application Code Manager for more information.
Library Upgrades
Add-On Instruction Upgrades
There are two methods to upgrading existing device object add-on
instructions in a project. You can do this either by using the Studio 5000 PlugIn Import Library Objects Wizard or by importing individual add-on instruction
AOI.L5X files. Both methods are described in the following sections.
Note that all updates to Add-On Instructions must be done with Studio 5000
Logix Designer in OFFLINE mode and a download to the controller is required.
Upgrades Using Studio 5000 Plug-In to Import Library Objects
If Studio 5000 Application Code Manager is installed, you can use the Studio
5000 Plug-In Import Library Objects Wizard to update existing Add-On
Instructions. For complete information on Studio 5000 Application Code
Manager, refer to the section Using Application Code Manager.
Right-click in your controller organizer or within a routine to access Plug-Ins >
Import Library Objects...
66
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
The Library Object Import Wizard dialogue window will open. Under Registered
Libraries expend (RA-LIB) Device > Asset-Control and find the desired object and
version. Drag the object into the Object Configuration window on the right.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
67
Using the Library
In the Merge Actions window, select the Action for the AddOnIntructionDefinition
to Overwrite. This will update any existing instance of the object to the newer
version. You may also choose to overwrite any other DataTypes or Tags. Review
the release notes of the latest library release to understand what may be
impacted. Click next and finish to complete the process.
68
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
•
After Importing the AOI. The AOI references in the routine are affected
and need to reconfigure it.
a. Drag and drop the tags from Unknown parameter to specific
parameter
b. Right click on AOI definition and Remove all unknown parameter.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
69
Using the Library
c. Assign and create new tags for Ref_Ctrl_Inf & Ref_Ctrl_Itf. The tag
name, data type and scope should be
Tag Name
Master_4IOL_CtrlInf
Master_4IOL_CtrlItf
Data Type
Scope
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf Controller
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices Controller
d. Change the Data type for Ref_Ctrl_Set, Ref_Ctrl_Cmd and
Ref_Ctrl_Sts parameter Tags using Right Click and select Edit tag
properties. The tag data type should be
Tag Name
AF_4002_CtrlSet
AF_4002_CtrlCmd
AF_4002_CtrlSts
70
Required Data Type
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
•
In order to ensure the HMI faceplate still works properly you will need
to update the object’s library information stored in the Inf_Lib tag. In
the Controller Organizer pane under Assets > Add-On Instructions expend
the device object that was updated. Double-click on Parameters and Local
Tags to open up the instructions tags.
•
In the Add-On Instruction Parameters and Local Tags window, you may
notice that the Inf_Lib tag in the add-on instruction definition matches
the new library revision number. Click on the down-arrow to the right
of the copy button and select Copy Specified Values...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
71
Using the Library
•
•
•
In the Copy Default Values window, be sure to first uncheck all
Parameters and Local Tags by clicking the +/- box in the top right.
Failure to do so may result in overwriting settings in the existing
objects.
Check only Inf_Lib in the Local Tag area. On the right, all affected objects
should be selected. Click OK.
You can now confirm that the Inf_Lib tag has been updated to the
current library (e.g. ‘raC-3_00’) by changing the Data Context dropdown to a specific device object.
Upgrades by Importing AOI.L5X Files
To upgrade or migrate a project that uses a previous library version to a newer
one, the add-on instruction L5X files are supplied. To perform an upgrade to
an object perform the following steps:
72
•
•
Open the controller file. Note changes must be done offline.
In the Controller Organizer pane right-click on Assets > Add-On Instructions
and select Import Add-On Instruction. Navigate to the AOI.L5X file in the
Studio 5000 Logix Designer Files - L5X and Open.
•
You will be prompted that there is an existing version of the instruction
that is different. Choose Overwrite as the operation and select OK once
you have read and understood the warnings. Your existing logic will be
updated with the new add-on instruction. Verify that your code
compiles and test adequately.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using the Library
•
After Importing the AOI. The AOI references in the routine are affected
and need to reconfigure it. Follow the steps from Link
FactoryTalk View Upgrades
To upgrade a device object in a FactoryTalk View ME application, simply
import the new faceplate .gfx display file into the application. If any global
objects or images have been added or modified, you may need to import these
as well. Any unused displays from previous versions may be removed or
deleted from the application.
Note that the reference to the faceplate version is set in the Add-On
Instruction Local Tag Inf_Lib so there does not need to be other modifications
to the HMI application.
Studio 5000 View Designer® Upgrades
To upgrade a device object in a Studio 5000 View Designer application, simply
import the open the new View Designer .vpd file and copy the
raC_Dvc_xxxxx_FP pop-up screen into the existing application. Find any
graphic symbol launch buttons in the application that open the faceplate, and
update the Action to open the new pop-up screen. Any unused pop-up screens
from previous versions may be removed or deleted from the application.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
73
Using the Library
74
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
4
Using Application Code Manager
Overview of Application
Code Manager
Studio 5000® Application Code Manager is a tool that enables more efficient
project development with libraries of reusable code. Application Code
Manager creates modular objects with customizable configuration parameters
using the reusable content. Application Code Manager can also create the
associated visualization, historical and alarming elements for a project.
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager can be easily used along with Rockwell
Automation application code libraries such as the PlantPAx Process Objects
Library, Machine Builder Library, and Device Object Libraries. For more
information on Studio 5000 Application Code Manager, refer to the
Application Code Manager User Manual.
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this
section:“How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_ACM.mp4” or “How_To_Import_and_Configure_TYPE_Objects_in_ACM
(5032 Master).mp4”
Creating a New Project
Begin by opening Application Code Manager.
Note: the last project (if any) is opened by default; otherwise a blank screen is
displayed.
Create a New Project or open an existing project. Navigate to File > New >
Project.
Select the desired project type (e.g. (RA-LIB) ACM 2.00 Project - Basic_Project)
and fill in the Name and Description.
To add a new controller to a project, in the Controller Preview window, rightclick on Controllers and select Add New...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
75
Using Application Code Manager
Select the desired controller type (e.g. ControlLogix_Controller,
GuardLogix_Controller, CompactLogix_Controller, etc). Enter a Name and
Description for the controller. Select the appropriate Chassis and Processor
configurations.
You can also configure the HMI AreaPath and.or AreaPathME parameters which
will be referenced if you use Application Code Manager to generate
FactoryTalk® View ME displays with graphic symbol launch buttons.
76
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using Application Code Manager
You can now add in any desired tasks and programs to your controller. RightClick on the Tasks folder underneath your controller in the Controller Preview
and Add New Task. Similarly, right-click on any Task and select Add New
Program. Complete the desired parameters for Tasks and Programs such as
name, type, period, etc.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
77
Using Application Code Manager
Adding & Configuring Device Prior to adding in any Device Objects, ensure you have registered the library in
Application Code Manager. Refer to Registering Libraries in Studio 5000
Objects
Application Code Manager for details.
In Case of 4IOL and 8IOL Masters, When using Studio 5000 Application Code
Manager with the IO-Link Device Library, note that you can add IO-Link master
module hardware and IO-Link Device Objects; however you must manually add
IO-Link sensors/devices to the IO-Link Master Modules after generating the
controller code.
Adding IO-Link Master I/O Module
If not already done you may need to add IO-Link Master I/O modules (4IOL,
8IOL or 5032) to your Controller I/O Configuration. This will allow you to link
tags in the IO-Link Device Library objects to IO-Link Master Module hardware.
Alternatively, you can replace or link these at a later time.
In the Controller Preview pane you find the I/O Configuration folder underneath
your controller. You may add 1732E ArmorBlock IO-Link Master modules
directly to the Ethernet network or add a remote 1734 POINT I/O rack with a
1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in the desired slot or add a 5032 8IOL Master
Module to the Ethernet network. Right-click the desired location and select Add
New.
You may choose to click on the Category filter to easily sort and find IO-Link I/O.
Selected the desired IO-Link I/O module and click Next.
In Case of 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module, user need to add a remote 1734
POINT I/O rack, then Right Click on Configured Rack and then choose to click on
the Category filter to easily sort and find IO-Link I/O. Selected the desired IO-Link
I/O module and click Next.
78
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using Application Code Manager
For ArmorBlock modules assign a Name, IPAddress, and RPI. For POINT I/O
modules assign the desired MasterName, Slot and RPI parameters for the
module. Click Finish to complete.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
79
Using Application Code Manager
80
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using Application Code Manager
Adding IO-Link Device Instructions
To add a Device Object into a project, right-click on a Program and Add New...
•
In the Object Configuration Wizard dialogue window you can click on the
Category heading to group objects by category and find IO-Link. Select
the desired IO-Link Device object (e.g. raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL) and click
Next.
Note that, 8IOL device objects (e.g. raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_8IOL) must be paired with
the 8IOL Master, 4IOL objects (e.g. raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_4IOL) must be paired with
the 4IOL Master and 5032 Objects (e.g. raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_Type1) must be paired
with 5032 Master.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
81
Using Application Code Manager
•
Fill in all of the required configuration parameters for the device object.
The following example shows a configuration of the
raC_LD_42AF_8IOL object.
Perform the following configuration:
•
•
•
•
•
82
Enter a name and description. Maximum name length can be 22
characters. Note that other parameters such as the RoutineName,
TagName, etc will auto-complete based on these fields.
Assign the Task and Program.
Select a ChannelNumber which is the IO-Link Master Module channel
that the IO-Link sensor or device is connected to.
Assign the MasterName by typing or browsing to the instance of the
IO-Link Master Module in the controller project (e.g. 1734-4IOL or
1732E-8IOLM12R)
The configuration should now be complete with no red X’s.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using Application Code Manager
•
•
For HMI Configuration refer to Configuring Displays.
Click on the Linked Libraries tab. Click the Auto Create button to
automatically create all of the required linked libraries.
•
Click Finish to complete the object configuration.
For specific devices details, refer to the appropriate chapter in this manual.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
83
Using Application Code Manager
Adding IO-Link Master Device Object
You can optionally add an IO-Link Master Module device object (e.g.
raC_Dvc_8IOL_Master, raC_Dvc_4IOL_Master, raC_Dvc_5032_Master) to
your project. This provides hardware diagnostic information for the master
and includes an HMI faceplate to summarize data from each connected
sensor. To add an IO-Link Master Object into a project, right-click on a
Program and Add New...
In the Object Configuration Wizard dialogue window you can click on the
Category heading to group objects by category and find IO-Link. Select the
desired IO-Link Master object (e.g. raC_LD_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster or
raC_LD_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster or raC_LD_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster) and click Next.
•
84
Assign your desired Name and Description fields.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using Application Code Manager
•
Type in or browse for the IO-Link Sensor/Device objects that are
connected to any applicable channels (Ch0, Ch1, etc). Browse by clicking
the ellipses ‘...’ to open the Select a Reference window. The center pane
will list all IO-Link category objects in your project. Double-click or
highlight the desired device and click Finish. Continue to process until
you have completed all applicable channels. Note that 8IOL device
objects (e.g. raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_8IOL) must be paired with the 8IOL
Master, 4IOL objects (e.g. raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_4IOL) must be paired
with the 4IOL Master and 5032 Device Objects (e.g.
raC_LD_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster) must be paired with the 5032 Master.
•
Type in or browse for the MasterName. This is the I/O module (e.g. 17344IOL or 1732E-8IOLM12R) instance that was previously created in the I/
O configuration. Browse by clicking the ellipses ‘...’ to open the Select a
Reference window. In the left window pane, select the instance of the I/O
module. Double-click or highlight the desired device and click Finish.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
85
Using Application Code Manager
86
•
•
For HMI Configuration refer to Configuring Displays.
Once you have completed all sections you can continue.
•
Click on the Linked Libraries tab and click Auto Create. Complete by
clicking Finish.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Using Application Code Manager
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
87
Using Application Code Manager
88
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Configuring Displays
Application Code Manager can be used to automatically configure graphic
symbol launch buttons for device objects In FactoryTalk View ME or SE. Note
that Application Code Manager is not compatible with Studio 5000 View
Designer applications.
First you must add Displays to your project. Under the System View panel
expand HMI and right-click on Displays to select Add. Choose the type of
display (e.g. FTViewME or FTViewSE depending on your project requirements.
In the display object parameter configuration, you must select the
DisplayTemplate type to match the version of FactoryTalk View application that
you are using.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
89
Navigate to the Displays tab where you can right-click and Add New display.
Set the desired name and display parameters. Generally all display parameters
aside from Name can be left as default since this will often be used as a
temporary display where object launch buttons are copied from.
Return to your device object configuration and view the HMI Configuration
section of the parameters. You can browse or type in the
HMI_Server_Name.HMI_Display_Name.
90
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
If you browse for the display, select the desired display server in the left panel,
then click on the Display tab in the right panel and select the specific display.
Click finish.
This workflow can be followed for either FactoryTalk View ME or SE
depending on the project requirements.
Generating Displays
Once you have assigned displays to all of the device objects, you can generate
the displays. In the System View highlight the desired display server under HMI
> Display and right-click to select Generate Displays > All Displays or select
individual displays. Choose a place to save the generated files and take note of
it.
Importing Displays into
FactoryTalk View Studio
To import the configured displays, open your FactoryTalk View ME/SE project
in FactoryTalk View Studio. Right-click on Graphic > Displays and select Import
and Export...
Follow the required prompts:
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
91
•
•
•
•
•
•
Import graphic information into displays
Choose whether or not to backup displays
Choose either a Single display import file (must have an existing or blank
display to import into) or Multiple displays batch import file if All Displays
was used to Generate Displays.
If this is the first time it is recommended to import Multiple displays
batch import file and then Create new objects on the display.
If you have done this before and are updating the imported display
after modifying your Application Code Manager project, you can
choose Update existing objects on the display.
Browse for the BatchImport.xml file or individual display.xml file.
Open up the newly imported display. Notice that there are graphic symbol
launch buttons labeled and configured for each item that was configured in
Application Code Manager.
Right-click on the object and select Global Object Parameters to view that all of
the parameters have been pre-configured for you.
You may not copy and paste this graphic symbol onto any other display in your
application.
Generating Controller Files
92
Once you have completed configuring your project in Studio 5000 Application
Code Manager, you can generate the controller file for use in Studio 5000
Logix Designer.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
In the Controller Preview pane right-click on the controller name within the
Controllers folder and select Generate Controller.
In the Logix Code Generation dialogue window you will need to check Create
ACD. You ma also need to check Overwrite Existing if this is not the first time
generating the controller code.
Once the controller file is generated, you can navigate to the location set in
Save Path and open your file. Note that all of the configuration that was done in
Application Code Manager is now shown in your Logix Designer ACD file.
Exporting Attachments
Application Code Libraries not only contain Logix code, but also contain
Visualization collateral and associated documentation. Every Asset library
contains at least a reference manual (RM). Those libraries which have
associated Visualization content also have all required global objects (GO),
images, static displays and View Designer applications added as attachments.
In this manner the user can generate only the necessary visualization and
documentation for the objects included in the project.
In Application Code Manager, all of the attachments are associated with the
device objects in the (RA-LIB) Device > Asset-Control folder. These can be
accessed both through the full Application Code Manager software, or via the
Studio 5000 Plug-In “Import Library Objects”.
To access the attached files, right click on the objects (e.g.
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL) and select Extract Attached Files.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
93
Select the destination folder on your computer, and select OK. An Extract
Attachments dialog will show the extraction status.
The extracted folder will contain the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
94
Reference Manual
Required Images
View Designer Faceplate Files
FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Display
FactoryTalk View Machine Edition Global Objects
FactoryTalk View Site Edition Display
FactoryTalk View Site Edition Global Objects
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
5
Using the IO-Link Device Library with Other
Application Code Libraries
Application Code Libraries
The IO-Link Device Library is can be used alongside other Application Code
Libraries.
The IO Device Library is recommended to be used along with the IO-Link
Device Library if Studio 5000 Application Code Manager is used for project
development. This will allow you to add IO-Link Master modules to the
controller I/O Configuration..
The Machine Builder Library and PlantPAx Process Object Library applicationlevel library objects may be used in the same applications with the device-level
objects in the IO-Link Device Library. At this time there are no direct
dependencies or interaction points between these libraries. They may be used
independently from one another but within the same application.
Other libraries utilize the common device interface UDTs to interact with
device level objects. In the case of the IO-Link Device Library you may programmatically reference the Status (Sts), Command (Cmd), and Setting (set)
interfaces of the instructions. This is covered in detail in Interfaces section of
this document.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
95
Using the IO-Link Device Library with Other Application Code Libraries
96
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor
(raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032)
Overview
The 42AF RightSight Photoelectric Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032) includes HMI faceplates which displays device
information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Sensor configuration and parameters
Process data trending
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk stepby-step through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_42AF_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Setpoint: Setpoint will allow the operators to enter the signal value
required for the sensor output to turn ON upon target detection.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
Teach: Offers the different teach functions.
The 42AF RightSight Photoelectric Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
97
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with Five
versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item Compatible IO-Link Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
42AF
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
Add-On Instruction
42AF-B1MAB1-xx, 42AF-B1MAB2-xx,
42AF-B1MAC1-xx, 42AF-N1MAC1-xx, raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
42AF-P2MAB1-xx, 42AF-R1MAB1-xx
42AF-B1MAB1-xx, 42AF-B1MAB2-xx,
42AF-B1MAC1-xx, 42AF-N1MAC1-xx, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
42AF-P2MAB1-xx, 42AF-R1MAB1-xx
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
42AF-B1MAB1-xx, 42AF-B1MAB2-xx
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
42AF-B1MAC1-xx, 42AF-N1MAC1-xx
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
42AF-P2MAB1-xx, 42AF-R1MAB1-xx
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
98
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Device/Item
Type
42AF
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_42AF-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_42AF-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
42AF
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Object
Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
1732E-8IOLM12R
42AF
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12DR
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032_(3.2)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_5032_(3.2)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
99
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. CapDetect_101
3. Select the Process Data Input as Triggered, Margin, Proximity, Gain,
Signal.
Device Definition
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
(raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_503 device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
2,
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032
1. Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
,
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032
)
100
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 42AF, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 42AF
Sensor.
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 42AF sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
101
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device
EnableIn False (false rung) were taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and
the device is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
102
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning
from Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position
feedback that is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position,
the device is set to that position. If the device does not have position feedback or
the position feedback is invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_42AF_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
IO-Link Device Type Information
Interface
IO-Link Device Command, Status
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[20]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_42AF_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_42AF_Inp_8IOL
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
Alignment Mode; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled for
120s,
3 = Enabled for 240s
DataType
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
SINT
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurations
Duration Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Duration Reset Command
BOOL
Cfg_AlignmentMode
SINT
Cmd_TeachPrecision_ShowTarget Teach Precision Show Target Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_Background
Teach Static Background Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_ShowTarget
Teach Static Show Target Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity Alarm of Senor
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
103
Chapter 6
104
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChxSignalStrength
Signal Strength of Sensor
DINT
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Set_Setpoint
Enter Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Val_AlignmentModeEnable
Alignment Mode Status; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled for INT
120s, 3 = Enabled for 240s
Val_Contrast
Sensor Contrast Level
INT
Val_NotTriggeredDuration
Sensor Output OFF Duration
INT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
Operating Hours Since Power Up
DINT
Val_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity Status, 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
INT
Val_PercentSP
Setpoint in Percent
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Setpoint
Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Internal Temperature Of Sensor
SINT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInceptio Maximum Temperature Since Inception
n
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerU Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
p
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInceptio Minimum Temperature Since Inception
n
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerU Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
p
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
105
Chapter 6
106
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_Trigger_Counter
Sensor Counter Value
SINT
Val_TriggeredDuration
Sensor Output ON Duration
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_503 InOut
2,
Ref_Module
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032 Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032 Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
)
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_42AF_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
IO-Link Device Type Information
Interface
IO-Link Device Command, Status
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_42AF_Inp_5032
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_42AF_Type1_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_42AF_Type2_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_42AF_Type3_Cfg
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
Alignment Mode; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled for
120s,
3 = Enabled for 240s
DataType
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
SINT
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurations
Duration Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Duration Reset Command
BOOL
Cfg_AlignmentMode
SINT
Cmd_TeachPrecision_ShowTarget Teach Precision Show Target Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_Background
Teach Static Background Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_ShowTarget
Teach Static Show Target Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration
Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
107
Chapter 6
108
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity Alarm of Senor
BOOL
Inp_ChxSignalStrength
Signal Strength of Sensor
DINT
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Set_Setpoint
Enter Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_AlignmentModeEnable
Alignment Mode Status; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled for INT
120s, 3 = Enabled for 240s
Val_Contrast
Sensor Contrast Level
INT
Val_NotTriggeredDuration
Sensor Output OFF Duration
INT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
Operating Hours Since Power Up
DINT
Val_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity Status, 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
INT
Val_PercentSP
Setpoint in Percent
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Setpoint
Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Internal Temperature Of Sensor
SINT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInceptio Maximum Temperature Since Inception
n
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerU Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
p
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInceptio Minimum Temperature Since Inception
n
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerU Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
p
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
109
Chapter 6
110
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_Trigger_Counter
Sensor Counter Value
SINT
Val_TriggeredDuration
Sensor Output ON Duration
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 42AF device object connected to channel #3 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module named Point_IO_4IOLMater in
slot #1 of a POINT I/O adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the 42AF device object connected to channel #4 of a
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
111
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
The following example uses the 42AF Sensor Type 1 device object connected to
channel #0 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master5032
The following example uses the 42AF Sensor Type 2 device object connected to
channel #2 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master5032
112
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
The following example uses the 42AF Sensor Type 3 device object connected to
channel #4 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master5032
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_LightSens
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
This launch button graphic object allows the
})
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
The text on the button face is set to the
Tag.@Description
parameter #104.
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
113
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_42AF_
Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
114
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
1
2
6
3
4
7
5
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Signal Strength (%) Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows the signal strength value over last 30 seconds
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until
the operator disables this function.
Process Data
- Triggered Duration (ms): Displays the amount of time that the sensor output has been ON. To
show the trigger duration on faceplate, required to make Timer Mode Enabled setting in AOP in
Logix Designer.
- Not Triggered Duration (ms): Displays the amount of time that the sensor output has been OFF.
To show the trigger duration on faceplate, required to make Timer Mode Enabled setting in AOP
in Logix Designer.
7
- Trigger Counter: Displays the sensor counter value when enabled. The counter value
increments every time the sensor is triggered this process data element can count up to 65535
and can be reset via reset count button from config tab. Refer to Appendix B for additional
information about index. To show the trigger count on faceplate, required to make Counter
Mode Enabled setting in AOP in Logix Designer.
- Signal Strength (%): Signal Strength provides the raw measurement value of the amount of
light reflected from the target.
- Contrast: Displays the difference between the light signal levels that the sensor read the last
time the output was ON versus the last time the output was OFF.
- Gain: Displays the excess gain above the sensor threshold to ensure reliable detection of the
target.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
115
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
4
4
Description
Internal Temperature Bar Graph
Green Indicators: Min/Max since inception (lifetime)
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Internal Temperature Current Value
Operating Hours Since Inception (lifetime)
Operating Hours Since Power Up
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is
power cycled.
116
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
decisions. One trend is displayed for Setpoint and Signal Strength.
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Setpoint & Signal strength.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
117
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
The configuration section is divided into sections:
•
•
•
•
•
Parameter Settings
Trigger Settings
Local Settings
Teach Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, “Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Parameter Settings
Setpoint - Allows operators to enter the signal value required for the sensor
output to turn ON (threshold) upon target detection. That means that the
sensor signal level must be higher than the threshold for the output to turn
ON. The default value for this parameter is 1000 with acceptable values
between 1000 and 65535.
Output Polarity - Polarity changes the sensor output to operate as Not Inverted
(Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate). Click on output polarity dropdown selector object to switch between Light On & Dark On.
Alignment Mode - This parameter changes the sensor user interface to operate
in alignment mode. The alignment mode uses the green and orange LEDs of
the sensor to visually indicate the strength of the light signal that is reflected
back from the object. Click on alignment mode drop-down selector object to
switch between Enable & Disable
Trigger Settings
Reset Count - Allows users to reset the counter function, it will reset the sensor
counts to zero.
118
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Reset Duration - Allows users to reset the timer function, it will reset Duration
Triggered & Duration Not Triggered time.
Local Settings
Disable/Enable LEDs - This parameter allows operators to turn OFF or turn
ON the User Interface LEDs (green and orange LEDs). This parameter is ideal
for applications where turning OFF the LEDs is desired to accommodate the
application.
Local Teach Parameters - This section allow user to lock / unlock device local
parameterization. Touch Lock/Unlock Toggle switch to Lock Local
Parameterization
Teach Settings
Teach Settings display includes the Teach Methods, Teach Command & Teach
Cancel buttons. Touch on the Teach Settings navigation button to access the
Teach Settings tab.
•
•
•
•
Teach tab includes the following functions.
Teach mode selection dropdown menu
Teach procedure flow buttons
Teach Cancel Button
Teach mode - This parameter selects the desired mode.
Static Teach - The first method is Static Teach, which is intended for
applications where the web can be stopped, or for more challenging
applications.
4. Place the target in front of the sensor and send the command to “Static
Teach - Show Target”.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
119
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
5. Show the background where the target will be present and then send
the command “Static Teach - Show Background”.
6. To cancel the procedure, you can send the “Teach Cancel” command at
any point.
Precision Teach - The Precision Teach is intended for applications where the
precise setting of the distance is more critical. This teach method is also
recommended for contrast applications.
1.
Place the target in front of the sensor and send the command to
“Precision Teach – Show Target”.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
120
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
121
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description_Test,
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
122
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_42AF_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Select the sensor series (i.e. 42AF), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
SensorType
42AF-B1MAB1-xx
42AF-B1MAB1-xx
ChannelNumber
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
42AF-B1MAB1-xx type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
123
Chapter 6
42AF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032,
Parameter Name
Default Value
Navigation Button
GraphicalButton
Instance Name
Definition
Description
HMI
Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL
raC_Dvc_42AF_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL
raC_Dvc_42AF_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type1_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type2_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_42AF_Type3_5032
raC_Dvc_42AF_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
124
Name
Description
Faceplate ME
File Name
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link
Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link
Device.ggfx
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_42AF-Faceplate.gfx
Extraction Path
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object ggfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object ggfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
V3_raC_Dvc_42AF
V3_raC_Dvc_42AF
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_42AF-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor
(raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032)
Overview
The 42EF RightSight Photoelectric Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Typse3_5032) includes HMI faceplates which displays device
information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Sensor configuration and parameters
Process data trending
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk stepby-step through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_42EF_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Setpoint: Setpoint will allow the operators to enter the signal value
required for the sensor output to turn ON upon target detection.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
The 42EF RightSight Photoelectric Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
125
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with five
versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item Compatible IO-Link Master Compatible IO-Link Sensor
42EF-D2JBAK-xx, 42EF-D2KBAK-xx,
42EF-D2MPAK-xx, 42EF-P2JBB-xx,
42EF-P2KBB-xx, 42EF-P2MPB-xx,
42EF-R2JBBT-xx, 42EF-R2JBB-xx,
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
42EF-R2KBBT-xx, 42EF-R2KBB-xx,
42EF-R2MNBT-xx, 42EF-R2MNB-xx,
42EF-R2MPBT-xx, 42EF-R2MPB-xx,
42EF-S1JBA-xx, 42EF-S1KBA-xx,
42EF-S1MPA-xx
42EF-D2JBAK-xx, 42EF-D2KBAK-xx,
42EF-D2MPAK-xx, 42EF-P2JBB-xx,
42EF-P2KBB-xx, 42EF-P2MPB-xx,
42EF-R2JBBT-xx, 42EF-R2JBB-xx,
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R 42EF-R2KBBT-xx, 42EF-R2KBB-xx,
42EF
42EF-R2MNBT-xx, 42EF-R2MNB-xx,
42EF-R2MPBT-xx, 42EF-R2MPB-xx,
42EF-S1JBA-xx, 42EF-S1KBA-xx,
42EF-S1MPA-xx
42EF-D2JBAK-xx, 42EF-D2KBAK-xx,
42EF-D2MPAK-xx, 42EF-P2JBB-xx,
42EF-P2KBB-xx, 42EF-P2MPB-xx,
42EF-S1JBA-xx, 42EF-S1KBA-xx,
5032-8IOLM12DR
42EF-S1MPA-xx
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
42EF-R2JBB-xx, 42EF-R2KBBT-xx,
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
42EF-R2KBB-xx, 42EF-R2MNBT-xx,
42EF-R2MNB-xx, 42EF-R2MPBT-xx,
42EF-R2MPB-xx
42EF-R2JBBT-xx
126
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL_3.01_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL_3.01_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
42EF
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_42EF-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_42EF-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
42EF
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
127
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Implementatio Compatible IO-Link
n Object
Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
1732E-8IOLM12R
42EF
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A (RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032_(3.2)
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_42EF_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_42EF_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_42EF_5032_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. CapDetect_101
3. Select the Process Data Input as Triggered, Margin, Proximity, Gain,
Signal.
128
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_503
2,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032
,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032
)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 42EF, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 42EF
Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
129
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 42EF sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device
EnableIn False (false rung) were taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and
the device is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
130
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Condition
Description
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning
from Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position
feedback that is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position,
the device is set to that position. If the device does not have position feedback or
the position feedback is invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
131
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_42EF_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
IO-Link Device Type Information
Interface
IO-Link Device Command, Status
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[20]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_42EF_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_42EF_Inp_8IOL
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
Alignment Mode; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled for
120s,
3 = Enabled for 240s
DataType
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
SINT
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurations
Duration Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Duration Reset Command
BOOL
Cfg_AlignmentMode
132
SINT
Cmd_TeachPrecision_ShowTarget Teach Precision Show Target Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_Background
Teach Static Background Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_ShowTarget
Teach Static Show Target Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity Alarm of Senor
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChxSignalStrength
Signal Strength of Sensor
DINT
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Set_Setpoint
Enter Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Val_AlignmentModeEnable
Alignment Mode Status; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled for INT
120s, 3 = Enabled for 240s
Val_Contrast
Sensor Contrast Level
INT
Val_NotTriggeredDuration
Sensor Output OFF Duration
INT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
Operating Hours Since Power Up
DINT
Val_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity Status, 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
INT
Val_PercentSP
Setpoint in Percent
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Setpoint
Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
133
Chapter 7
134
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Internal Temperature Of Sensor
SINT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInceptio Maximum Temperature Since Inception
n
SINT
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
SINT
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInception Minimum Temperature Since Inception
SINT
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
SINT
Val_Trigger_Counter
Sensor Counter Value
SINT
Val_TriggeredDuration
Sensor Output ON Duration
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_503 InOut
2,
Ref_Module
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032 Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032 Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
)
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_42EF_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
IO-Link Device Type Information
Interface
IO-Link Device Command, Status
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_42EF_Inp_5032
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_42EF_Type1_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_42EF_Type2_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_42EF_Type3_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
Alignment Mode; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled for
120s,
3 = Enabled for 240s
DataType
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
SINT
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurations
Duration Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration
Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity Alarm of Senor
BOOL
Inp_ChxSignalStrength
Signal Strength of Sensor
DINT
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Cfg_AlignmentMode
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
135
Chapter 7
136
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Set_Setpoint
Enter Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_AlignmentModeEnable
Alignment Mode Status; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled, 2 = Enabled for INT
120s, 3 = Enabled for 240s
Val_Contrast
Sensor Contrast Level
INT
Val_NotTriggeredDuration
Sensor Output OFF Duration
INT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
Operating Hours Since Power Up
DINT
Val_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity Status, 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
INT
Val_PercentSP
Setpoint in Percent
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Setpoint
Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Internal Temperature Of Sensor
SINT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInceptio Maximum Temperature Since Inception
n
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerU Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
p
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInceptio Minimum Temperature Since Inception
n
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerU Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
p
SINT
Val_Trigger_Counter
Sensor Counter Value
SINT
Val_TriggeredDuration
Sensor Output ON Duration
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
SINT
SINT
137
Chapter 7
138
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_SignalStrengthOn
Signal Strength On Value
DINT
Val_SignalStrengthOff
Signal Strength Off Value
DINT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 42EF device object connected to channel #3 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module named PointIO_4IOL_Master in
slot #8 of a POINT I/O adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the 42EF device object connected to channel #0 of
a ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
139
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
The following example uses the 42EF Sensor Type 1 device object connected to
channel #6 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master5032_1
The following example uses the 42EF Sensor Type 2 device object connected to
channel #8 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master5032_1
140
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
The following example uses the 42EF Sensor Type 3 device object connected to
channel #10 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master5032_1
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_LightSens
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
This launch button graphic object allows the
})
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
The text on the button face is set to the
Tag.@Description
parameter #104.
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
141
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_42EF_
Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
142
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
1
6
2
3
4
7
5
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Signal Strength (%) Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows the signal strength value over last 30 seconds
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until
the operator disables this function
Process Data
- Triggered Duration (ms): Displays the amount of time that the sensor output has been ON. To
show the trigger duration on faceplate, required to make Timer Mode Enabled setting in AOP in
Logix Designer.
- Not Triggered Duration (ms): Displays the amount of time that the sensor output has been OFF.
To show the trigger duration on faceplate, required to make Timer Mode Enabled setting in AOP
in Logix Designer.
7
- Trigger Counter: Displays the sensor counter value when enabled. The counter value
increments every time the sensor is triggered this process data element can count up to 65535
and can be reset via reset count button from config tab. Refer to Appendix B for additional
information about index. To show the trigger count on faceplate, required to make Counter
Mode Enabled setting in AOP in Logix Designer.
- Signal Strength (%): Signal Strength provides the raw measurement value of the amount of
light reflected from the target.
- Contrast: Displays the difference between the light signal levels that the sensor read the last
time the output was ON versus the last time the output was OFF.
- Gain: Displays the excess gain above the sensor threshold to ensure reliable detection of the
target.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
143
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
4
4
Description
Internal Temperature Bar Graph
Green Indicators: Min/Max since inception (lifetime)
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Internal Temperature Current Value
Operating Hours Since Inception (lifetime)
Operating Hours Since Power Up
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is
power cycled.
144
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
decisions. One trend is displayed for Setpoint and Signal Strength.
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Setpoint & Signal strength.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
145
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
The configuration section is divided into sections:
•
•
•
•
Parameter Settings
Trigger Settings
Local Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Parameter Settings
Setpoint - Allows operators to enter the signal value required for the sensor
output to turn ON (threshold) upon target detection. That means that the
sensor signal level must be higher than the threshold for the output to turn
ON. The default value for this parameter is 1000 with acceptable values
between 1000 and 65535.
Output Polarity - Polarity changes the sensor output to operate as Not Inverted
(Light On) and Inverted (Dark On). Click on output polarity drop-down
selector object to switch between Light On & Dark On.
Alignment Mode - This parameter changes the sensor user interface to operate
in alignment mode. The alignment mode uses the green and orange LEDs of
the sensor to visually indicate the strength of the light signal that is reflected
back from the object. Click on alignment mode drop-down selector object to
switch between Enable & Disable
Trigger Settings
Reset Count - Allows users to reset the counter function, it will reset the sensor
counts to zero.
146
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Reset Duration - Allows users to reset the timer function, it will reset Duration
Triggered & Duration Not Triggered time.
Local Settings
Disable/Enable LEDs - This parameter allows operators to turn OFF or turn
ON the User Interface LEDs (green and orange LEDs). This parameter is ideal
for applications where turning OFF the LEDs is desired to accommodate the
application.
Local Teach Parameters - This section allow user to lock / unlock device local
parameterization. Touch Lock/Unlock Toggle switch to Lock Local
Parameterization
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
147
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
2
3
4
148
5
6
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
149
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_42EF_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_42EF_8IOL
Implementation Objects: raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032,
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Select the sensor series (i.e. 42EF), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
SensorType
42EF-D2JBAK-xx
42EF-D2JBAK-xx
ChannelNumber
150
[Master5032]
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
42EF-D2JBAK-xx type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 7
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Navigation Button
HMI
Configuration
GraphicalButton
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL
raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL
raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_42EF_Type3_5032
raC_Dvc_42EF_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
Name
Description
File Name
V3_raC_Dvc_42EF
Extraction Path
Graphic Symbols ME (raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - Io-link Device.ggfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object ggfx
Graphic Symbols SE (raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - Io-link Device.ggfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object ggfx
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_42EF-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_42EF
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_42EF-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
151
Chapter 7
152
42EF - RightSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42EF_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42EF_Type2_5032,
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor
(raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032)
Overview
The 42JT VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032) includes HMI faceplates which displays device
information including:
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
Primary device object configuration functions include:
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_42JT_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
•
•
•
Functional Description
Setpoint: Setpoint will allow the operators to enter the signal value
required for the sensor output to turn ON upon target detection.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
Teach: Offers the different teach functions.
The 42JT VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
153
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with five
versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item Compatible IO-Link Master Compatible IO-Link Sensor
42JT-B2LAT1-xx, 42JT-B2LAT2-xx,
42JT-C2LAT1-xx, 42JT-R9LAT1-xx,
42JT-R8LAT1-xx, 42JT-F5LET1-xx,
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
42JT-P8LAT1-xx, 42JT-D8LAT1-xx,
42JT-P2LAT1-xx, 42JT-D2LAT1-xx,
42JT-B8LAT1-xx
42JT-B2LAT1-xx, 42JT-B2LAT2-xx,
42JT-C2LAT1-xx, 42JT-R9LAT1-xx,
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R 42JT-R8LAT1-xx, 42JT-F5LET1-xx,
42JT
42JT-P8LAT1-xx, 42JT-D8LAT1-xx,
42JT-P2LAT1-xx, 42JT-D2LAT1-xx
42JT-B2LAT1-xx, 42JT-B2LAT2-xx,
42JT-C2LAT1-xx, 42JT-R9LAT1-xx,
5032-8IOLM12DR
42JT-R8LAT1-xx
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
42JT-F5LET1-xx, 42JT-P8LAT1-xx,
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
42JT-D8LAT1-xx
42JT-P2LAT1-xx, 42JT-D2LAT1-xx
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
154
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Device/Item
Type
42JT
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_42JT-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_42JT-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
42JT
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Object
Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
1732E-8IOLM12R
42JT
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12DR
RA-LIB)_Device_Asset5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032_(3.2)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_42JT_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_42JT_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_42JT_5032_(3.2)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
155
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. 42JT_101
Device Definition
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
(raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_503 device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
2,
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032
1. Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
,
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032
)
156
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 42JT, you can find them, in IO-Link
of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 42JT Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
157
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 42JT sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
158
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_42JT_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
IO-Link Device Type Information Interface raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
IO-Link Device Command, Status Interface raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[20]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_42JT_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_42JT_Inp_8IOL
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cfg_Gain
Gain; 0 = Low, 1 = High
SINT
Cfg_LightSource
Light Source; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
SINT
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Polarity; 0 = Inverted, 1 = Not Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DynamicTeachStart
Dynamic Teach Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_DynamicTeachStop
Dynamic Teach Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_PrecisionTeach
Precision Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachShowBackground Static Teach Background Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachShowTarget
Static Teach Mark Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Teach Cancel Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachModeStart
Teach Mode Start Command
BOOL
Set_Setpoint
Enter Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
159
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Val_Gain
Gain Status; 0 = Low, 1 = High
INT
Val_LightSource
Light Source Status; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
DINT
Val_OutputPolarityInverted Polarity Status; 0 = Inverted, 1 = Not Inverted
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Setpoint
Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Val_TeachMode
Teach Mode Status; 0 = Static, 1 = Dynamic, 2 = Precision
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_ Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
DV_LD
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_503 InOut
2,
Ref_Module
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032 Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032 Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
)
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_42JT_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
160
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
IO-Link Device Type Information
Interface
IO-Link Device Command, Status
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_42JT_Inp_5032
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_42JT_Type1_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_42JT_Type2_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_42JT_Type3_Cfg
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
161
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cfg_Gain
Gain; 0 = Low, 1 = High
SINT
Cfg_LightSource
Light Source; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
SINT
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Polarity; 0 = Inverted, 1 = Not Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DynamicTeachStart
Dynamic Teach Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_DynamicTeachStop
Dynamic Teach Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_PrecisionTeach
Precision Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachShowBackground
Static Teach Background Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachShowTarget
Static Teach Mark Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Teach Cancel Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachModeStart
Teach Mode Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration
Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Set_Setpoint
Enter Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Output Data
162
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_Gain
Gain Status; 0 = Low, 1 = High
INT
Val_LightSource
Light Source Status; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
DINT
Val_OutputPolarityInverted
Polarity Status; 0 = Inverted, 1 = Not Inverted
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Setpoint
Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
DINT
Val_TeachMode
Teach Mode Status; 0 = Static, 1 = Dynamic, 2 = Precision
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
163
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 42JT device object connected to channel #9 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #1 of a POINT I/O adapter
named _AdapterName.
The following example uses the 42JT device object connected to channel #2 of a
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
164
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
The following example uses the 42JT Sensor Type 1 device object connected to
channel #12 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_1.
The following example uses the 42JT Sensor Type 2 device object connected to
channel #14 of a ArmorBlock 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module
in named Mod_Master_5032_1.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
165
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
The following example uses the 42JT Sensor Type 3 device object connected to
channel #0 of a ArmorBlock 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module
in named Mod_Master_5032_2.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
GO_LaunchFP
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
GO_LaunchGfx_LightSens
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Graphic button can be used in
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
displayed. The text on the button face is set to
the parameter #104.
166
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_42JT_
Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in View
Designer is used to navigate to the
faceplate in a user application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
167
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into sections:
•
•
•
•
168
Parameter Settings
Local Settings
Teach Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
4
1
2
5
3
6
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Setpoint: This parameter allows you to enter the threshold of when the sensor output turns ON.
Valid setpoint ranges vary by specific sensor type:
42JT-D2x: 20...1000
42JT-P2x: 60…1000
42JT-B2LAT2x: 0…25000
42JT-B2LAT1x: 0…28000
42JT-B8LAT1x: 0…31700
Output Polarity: Polarity changes the sensor output to operate as Light On (Non Inverted) and Dark
On (Inverted).
Light Source: Turn the sensor Light Source ON or OFF.
Teach Settings: Launch the teach settings window.
Gain: Current gain level of the sensor to operate in high or low conditions. A high gain helps ensure
that the sensor is able to detect targets with good reflectivity at longer ranges or verify that targets
with low reflectivity are also detected at shorter ranges.
Local Teach Unlock/Lock Toggle Switch: Locks unauthorized people from changing the sensor
settings using the local device push buttons.Toggle the lock/unlock button to prevent
parameterization using local push buttons.
Teach Settings
Teach Settings display includes the Teach Methods, Teach Command & Teach
Cancel buttons. Touch on the Teach Settings navigation button to access the
Teach Settings tab.
Teach tab includes the following functions:
•
•
•
Teach mode selection drop-down menu (Static/Dynamic/Precision)
Teach procedure flow buttons
Teach cancel button
The operator must complete each stage to teach sensor successfully. During
the teach process the operator must complete the current stage prior to the
next stage being made available to operator. At any stage of teaching, the
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
169
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
process can be canceled by pressing cancel button. When operator cancels the
teach process, all completed stages are cleared and the teach process will
restart from initial stage.
3
1
2
4
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Teach Mode:
- Static
- Dynamic
- Precision Teach
Teach procedure flow buttons
Teach setting window close button
Cancel: To cancel the procedure, you can send the “Teach Cancel” command at any point.
Teach mode - This parameter selects the desired mode.
Static Teach - The first method is Static Teach, which is intended for
applications where the web can be stopped, or for more challenging
applications.
Place the target in front of the sensor and send the command to “Static
Teach - Show Target”.
2. Show the background where the target will be present and then send
the command “Static Teach - Show Background”.
1.
170
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
3. To cancel the procedure, you can send the “Teach Cancel” command at
any point.
Dynamic Teach - The second method is Dynamic Teach, which is intended for
applications where the web can be Running.
Precision Teach - The Precision Teach is intended for applications where the
precise setting of the distance is more critical. This teach method is also
recommended for contrast applications.
1.
Place the target in front of the sensor and send the command to
“Precision Teach – Show Target”.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
171
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
172
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
173
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_42JT_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_42JT_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
174
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Implementation Objects: raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Select the sensor series (i.e. 42JT), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
SensorType
42JT-B2LAT1-xx
42JT-B2LAT1-xx
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
42JT-B2LAT1-xx type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
HMI
Configuration
GraphicalButton
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL
raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL
raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_42JT_Type3_5032
raC_Dvc_42JT_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
175
Chapter 8
42JT - VisiSight Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_42JT_4IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_8IOL, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_42JT_Type2_5032,
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
176
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_42JT
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_42JT-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_42JT
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_42JT-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor
(raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Overview
The 871FM Mini Flat Pack Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032) includes HMI faceplates which displays device
information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Sensor configuration and parameters
Process data trending
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_871FM_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
The 871FM Mini Flat Pack Sensor Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
177
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with four
versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/ Compatible IO-Link
Item
Master
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
871FM-M10BA30-xxxx, 871FM-M7BA20-xxxx,
871FM-MV10BA30-xxxx, 871FM-MV7BA20-xxxx
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
871FM
raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
871FM-M1NP5-AP3, 871FM-M1NP5-E2,
871FM-M2NP5-AP3, 871FM-M2NP5-E2,
871FM-M2NP8-E2, 871FM-M2NP8-P3
871FM-M10BA30-xxxx, 871FM-M7BA20-xxxx,
871FM-MV10BA30-xxxx, 871FM-MV7BA20-xxxx
ArmorBlock 1732EraC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
8IOLM12R
871FM-M1NP5-AP3, 871FM-M1NP5-E2,
871FM-M2NP5-AP3, 871FM-M2NP5-E2,
871FM-M2NP8-E2, 871FM-M2NP8-P3
871FM-M10BA30-xxxx, 871FM-M7BA20-xxxx,
871FM-MV10BA30-xxxx, 871FM-MV7BA20-xxxx raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A 871FM-M1NP5-AP3, 871FM-M1NP5-E2,
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
871FM-M2NP5-AP3, 871FM-M2NP5-E2,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
871FM-M2NP8-E2, 871FM-M2NP8-P3
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
178
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Device/Item
Type
871FM
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_871FM-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_871FM-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
871FM
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Object
Master
POINT I/O
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1734-4IOL
Link_raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL_(3.2)
ArmorBlock
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1732E-8IOLM12R
Link_raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL_(3.2)
871FM
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO5032-8IOLM12DR
Link_raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Link_raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032_(3.2)
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_8IOL_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
179
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. MetalDetect_101
3. Select the Process Data Input as Triggered, Margin, Proximity, Gain,
Signal.
Device Definition
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
(raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_503 device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
2,
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_503
1. Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
2)
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
180
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 871FM, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 871FM
Sensor.
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 871FM sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
181
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
182
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_871FM_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_871FM_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_871FM_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChXMarginLowAlarm Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity Alarm of Senor
BOOL
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxSiganalStrength Signal Strength of Sensor
DINT
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_OutputPolarity
Set Output Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 =
Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurations
Duration Reset Command
BOOL
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
183
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or BOOL
warning exists
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable
Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code BOOL
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure BOOL
is active
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
Sts_InhibitCfg
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from BOOL
HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from BOOL
HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate;
BOOL
0=Allow
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Val_Contrast
Sensor Contrast Level
INT
Val_NotTriggeredDuration
Sensor Output OFF Duration
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
Operating Hours Since Power Up
DINT
Val_OutputPolarity
Output Polarity Status, 0 = Not Inverted, 1 =
Inverted
SINT
Val_PercentSP
Setpoint in Percent
DINT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Setpoint
Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
INT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Internal Temperature Of Sensor
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception
Maximum Temperature Since Inception
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp
Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
INT
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInception
Minimum Temperature Since Inception
SINT
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp
Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
INT
Val_Trigger_Counter
Sensor Counter Value
DINT
Val_TriggeredDuration
Sensor Output ON Duration
DINT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
184
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DataType
BOOL
BOOL
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_503 InOut
2,
Ref_Module
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_503 Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
2)
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_871FM_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_871FM_Type1_Inp_5032 Or
raC_UDT_IOLink_871FM_Type2_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_871FM_Type1_Cfg Or
raC_UDT_IOLink_871FM_Type2_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChXMarginLowAlarm Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity Alarm of Senor
BOOL
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxSiganalStrength Signal Strength of Sensor
DINT
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_OutputPolarity
Set Output Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 =
Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurations
Duration Reset Command
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
185
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Input
186
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or BOOL
warning exists
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault
exists
Device is connected to the Programmable
Controller
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DataType
BOOL
DINT
BOOL
Sts_Active
Device is available for interaction with user
code
Device active status: 1 = output power
structure is active
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from BOOL
HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from BOOL
HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate;
BOOL
0=Allow
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_Contrast
Sensor Contrast Level
INT
Val_NotTriggeredDuration
Sensor Output OFF Duration
DINT
Val_TriggeredDuration
Sensor Output ON Duration
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
Operating Hours Since Power Up
DINT
Val_OutputPolarity
Output Polarity Status, 0 = Not Inverted, 1 =
Inverted
SINT
Val_PercentSP
Setpoint in Percent
DINT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Setpoint
Setpoint Value To Turn ON Sensor Output
INT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Internal Temperature Of Sensor
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception
Maximum Temperature Since Inception
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp
Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
INT
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInception
Minimum Temperature Since Inception
SINT
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp
Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
INT
Sts_Available
Sts_InhibitCmd
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
187
Chapter 9
188
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_Trigger_Counter
Sensor Counter Value
DINT
Val_TriggeredDuration
Sensor Output ON Duration
DINT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 871FM device object connected to channel #0 of
a POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #7 of a POINT I/O
adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the 871FM device object connected to channel #1 of
a ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
189
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
The following example uses the 871FM Type1 Sensor device object connected to
channel #0 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_3.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
GO_LaunchFP
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. #102:
This launch button graphic object allows the user {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
GO_LaunchGfx_IndSens
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
190
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_871FM_
Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
191
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
1
6
2
3
4
7
5
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Signal Strength (%) Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows the signal strength value over last 30 seconds
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
Process Data
- Triggered Duration (ms): Displays the amount of time that the sensor output has been ON. To show
the trigger duration on faceplate, required to make Timer Mode Enabled setting in AOP in Logix
Designer.
- Not Triggered Duration (ms): Displays the amount of time that the sensor output has been OFF. To
show the trigger duration on faceplate, required to make Timer Mode Enabled setting in AOP in Logix
Designer.
7
- Trigger Counter: Displays the sensor counter value when enabled. The counter value increments
every time the sensor is triggered this process data element can count up to 65535 and can be reset
via reset count button from config tab. Refer to Appendix B for additional information about index.
To show the trigger count on faceplate, required to make Counter Mode Enabled setting in AOP in
Logix Designer.
- Signal Strength (%): Signal Strength provides the raw measurement value of the amount of light
reflected from the target.
- Contrast: Displays the difference between the light signal levels that the sensor read the last time
the output was ON versus the last time the output was OFF.
- Gain: Displays the excess gain above the sensor threshold to ensure reliable detection of the
target.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
192
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
4
4
Description
Internal Temperature Bar Graph
Green Indicators: Min/Max since inception (lifetime)
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Internal Temperature Current Value
Operating Hours Since Inception (lifetime)
Operating Hours Since Power Up
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is power
cycled.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
193
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
decisions. One trend is displayed for Setpoint and Signal Strength.
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Setpoint & Signal strength.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into sections:
•
•
194
Parameter Settings
Local Settings
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
•
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Parameter Settings
Output Polarity - Polarity changes the sensor output to operate as Not Inverted
(Light On) and Inverted (Dark On). Click on output polarity drop-down
selector object to switch between Light On & Dark On.
Trigger Settings
Reset Count - Allows users to reset the counter function, it will reset the sensor
counts to zero.
Reset Duration - Allows users to reset the timer function, it will reset Duration
Triggered & Duration Not Triggered time.
Local Settings
Disable/Enable LEDs - This parameter allows operators to turn OFF or turn
ON the User Interface LEDs (green and orange LEDs). This parameter is ideal
for applications where turning OFF the LEDs is desired to accommodate the
application.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
195
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
196
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
197
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
SensorType
Select the sensor type as per version of the device.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
198
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Select the sensor series (i.e. 871FM), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
SensorType
871FM-M10BA30-xxxx
the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI type
871FM-M10BA30-xxxx 871FM-M10BA30-xxxx Select
of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or Type3)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL
raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL
raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_871FM_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
199
Chapter 9
871FM - Mini Flat Pack Sensor (raC_Dvc_871FM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_871FM_Type2_5032)
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
200
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_871FM
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_871FM-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_871FM
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_871FM-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor
(raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Overview
The 871C Mini Tubular Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032) includes HMI faceplates which
displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Diagnostic Data
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_871C_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
Functional Description
Timer Settings: This function helps to manipulating the output of the
sensor in relation to timing. It is useful for precision applications
where the output of the sensor must be precisely triggered at a certain
time.
The 871C Mini Tubular Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status Faceplates for Machine Startup, Commissioning,
Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
201
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with
three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item
Compatible IO-Link Master Compatible IO-Link Sensor
Add-On Instruction
871C-D1NP4-AP3, 871C-DM1NP3-AP3,
871C-DM1NP4-AP3, 871C-M1NP4-AP3,
871C-MM1NP3-AP3
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
871C-D1NP4-E2, 871C-D1NP5-E2,
871C-DM1NP3-E2, 871C-DM1NP4-E2,
871C-M1NP4-E2, 871C-M1NP5-E2,
871C-MM1NP3-E2, 871C-MM1NP4-E2
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_871C_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_871C_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
871C-D1NP5-P3, 871C-DM1NP4-P3,
871C-M1NP5-P3, 871C-MM1NP4-P3
871C-D1NP4-AP3, 871C-DM1NP3-AP3,
871C-DM1NP4-AP3, 871C-M1NP4-AP3,
871C-MM1NP3-AP3
871C
871C-D1NP4-E2, 871C-D1NP5-E2,
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R 871C-DM1NP3-E2, 871C-DM1NP4-E2,
871C-M1NP4-E2, 871C-M1NP5-E2,
871C-MM1NP3-E2, 871C-MM1NP4-E2
871C-D1NP5-P3, 871C-DM1NP4-P3,
871C-M1NP5-P3, 871C-MM1NP4-P3
871C-D1NP4-AP3, 871C-DM1NP3-AP3,
871C-DM1NP4-AP3, 871C-M1NP4-AP3,
871C-MM1NP3-AP3
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
871C-D1NP4-E2, 871C-D1NP5-E2,
871C-DM1NP3-E2, 871C-DM1NP4-E2,
871C-M1NP4-E2, 871C-M1NP5-E2,
871C-MM1NP3-E2, 871C-MM1NP4-E2
871C-D1NP5-P3, 871C-DM1NP4-P3,
871C-M1NP5-P3, 871C-MM1NP4-P3
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
202
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
871C
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_871C-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_871C-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
871C
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Object
Master
POINT I/O
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1734-4IOL
Link_raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL_(3.2)
ArmorBlock
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO871C
1732E-8IOLM12R
Link_raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A (RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_871C_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_871C_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_871C_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_871C_5032_(3.2)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
203
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
2. Apply the following Channel Configuration for 871C.
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
204
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 871C, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 871C
Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
205
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 871C sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
206
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL)
Ref_Module
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_871C_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_871C_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_871C_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChXTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_BaseTime
Set Time Base for setting delay; 0= 0.1 ms, 1 = 0.4 ms, 2 = 1.6 ms,
DINT
3 = 6.4 ms
Set the Timer Mode; 0 = No Timer, 1 = Off Delay, 2 = On Delay, 3 = On Delay DINT
and Off Delay
Cfg_TimerMode
Set_Multiplier
Set Multiplier for setting delay; 0 to 63
INT
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Output Data
Output
Sts_Connected
Function/Descritpion
Device is connected to the Programmable
Controller
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or BOOL
warning exists
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure BOOL
is active
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DataType
BOOL
BOOL
207
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Val_BaseTime
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from BOOL
HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from BOOL
HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate;
BOOL
0=Allow
Value for Time Base for setting delay; 0= 0.1 ms, INT
1 = 0.4 ms, 2 = 1.6 ms, 3 = 6.4 ms
Val_Counter
Sensor Counter Value
INT
Val_Multiplier
Value of Multiplier for setting delay; 0 to 255
INT
Val_TimerMode
Value of the Timer Mode; 0 = No Timer, 1 = Off INT
Delay, 2 = On Delay, 3 = On Delay and Off Delay
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Actual internal Sensor Temperature
REAL
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception
Maximum internal sensor temperature over
whole sensor lifetime
REAL
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
Sts_InhibitCmd
Sts_InhibitSet
208
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_871C_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_871C_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_871C_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChXTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_BaseTime
Set Time Base for setting delay; 0= 0.1 ms, 1 = 0.4 ms, 2 = 1.6 ms,
3 = 6.4 ms
Set the Timer Mode; 0 = No Timer, 1 = Off Delay, 2 = On Delay, 3 = On
Delay and Off Delay
DINT
Set_Multiplier
Set Multiplier for setting delay; 0 to 63
INT
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cfg_TimerMode
Cmd_ApplyConfigurati Module reconfigure Command
on
DINT
BOOL
Output Data
Output
Sts_Available
Function/Descritpion
Device is connected to the Programmable
Controller
Device is available for interaction with user
code
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or BOOL
warning exists
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault
exists
Sts_Connected
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DataType
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
209
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power
structure is active
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from BOOL
HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from BOOL
HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate;
BOOL
0=Allow
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_BaseTime
Value for Time Base for setting delay; 0= 0.1
ms, 1 = 0.4 ms, 2 = 1.6 ms, 3 = 6.4 ms
INT
Val_Counter
Sensor Counter Value
INT
Val_Multiplier
Value of Multiplier for setting delay; 0 to 255
INT
Val_TimerMode
Value of the Timer Mode; 0 = No Timer, 1 = Off INT
Delay, 2 = On Delay, 3 = On Delay and Off Delay
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Actual internal Sensor Temperature
REAL
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception
Maximum internal sensor temperature over
whole sensor lifetime
REAL
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
Sts_InhibitCmd
210
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
Programming Example
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 871C device object connected to channel #3 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #5 of a POINT I/O adapter
named Rack01.
The following example uses the 871C device object connected to channel #0 of a
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
211
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
The following example uses the 871C device object connected to channel #0 of a
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_3.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_IndSens
212
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102:
AOI
Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol
Name
AOG_871C_Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button
in View Designer is used to
navigate to the faceplate in
a user application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
213
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
1
2
3
4
5
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Sensor Name
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Trigger Counter
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
214
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
1
Item
1
2
2
Description
Provides maximum internal sensor temperature over the sensor lifetime.
Live internal sensor temperature when read.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section include
•
•
Parameter Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
215
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Base Time- While sensing the Target if user wants to add Time delay, it is
added with combination of base time and multiplier. Here unit of Base time is
milliseconds. Click on Base Time drop-down selector object to select different
Base times like 0.1, 0.4, 1.6 and 6.4
Multiplier- While counting the object if user wants to add Time delay, it is
added with combination of base time and multiplier. This parameter allows
you to enter the Multiplier values.
Mode- The switching timer is a useful function for manipulating the output of
the sensor in relation to timing. It is useful for precision applications where
the output of the sensor must be precisely triggered at a certain time. Click on
Mode drop-down selector object to select different Timer modes like No Timer,
Off Delay, On Delay and On Delay and Off Delay
Reset Count - Allows users to reset the counter function, it will reset the sensor
counts to zero
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
216
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
217
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
218
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871C_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_LD_Dvc_871C_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871C_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
219
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
{RoutineName}
[Master5032]
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
Select the sensor series (i.e. 871C), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
SensorType
871C-D1NP4-AP3
871C-D1NP4-AP3
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
871C-D1NP4-AP3
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL
raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_871C_5032
raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
220
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 10
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Attachments
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_871C
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_871C-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_871C
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_871C-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
221
Chapter 10
222
871C - Mini Tubular Sensor (raC_Dvc_871C_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871C_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor
(raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Overview
The 871TM Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor device object
(raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
includes HMI faceplates which displays device information including:
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_871TM_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
Functional Description
Timer Settings: This function helps to manipulating the output of the
sensor in relation to timing. It is useful for precision applications
where the output of the sensor must be precisely triggered at a certain
time.
The 871TM Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor Sensor pre-configured Device
Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status Faceplates for Machine Startup, Commissioning,
Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
223
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with
three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/
Item
Compatible IO-Link Master Compatible IO-Link Sensor
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
871TM
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
871TM-M10NP18-A2, 871TM-M10NP18-D4,
871TM-M20NP30-A2, 871TM-M20NP30-D4
871TM-M3NP8-D4, 871TM-M3NP8-D4
871TM-M3NP8-J2, 871TM-M3NP8-P3
871TM-M6NP12-A2, 871TM-M6NP12-A7,
871TM-M6NP12-D4, 871TM-N6NP8-J2
871TM-M10NP12-A2, 871TM-M10NP12-D4
871TM-M20NP18-A2, 871TM-M20NP18-D4
871TM-M40NP30-A2, 871TM-M40NP30-D4
871TM-N6NP8-D4, 871TM-N6NP8-P3
871TM-M10NP18-A2, 871TM-M10NP18-D4,
871TM-M20NP30-A2, 871TM-M20NP30-D4
871TM-M3NP8-D4, 871TM-M3NP8-D4
871TM-M3NP8-J2, 871TM-M3NP8-P3
871TM-M6NP12-A2, 871TM-M6NP12-A7,
871TM-M6NP12-D4, 871TM-N6NP8-J2
871TM-M10NP12-A2, 871TM-M10NP12-D4
871TM-M20NP18-A2, 871TM-M20NP18-D4
871TM-M40NP30-A2, 871TM-M40NP30-D4
871TM-N6NP8-D4, 871TM-N6NP8-P3
871TM-M10NP18-A2, 871TM-M10NP18-D4,
871TM-M20NP30-A2, 871TM-M20NP30-D4
871TM-M3NP8-D4, 871TM-M3NP8-D4
871TM-M3NP8-J2, 871TM-M3NP8-P3
871TM-M6NP12-A2, 871TM-M6NP12-A7,
871TM-M6NP12-D4, 871TM-N6NP8-J2
871TM-M10NP12-A2, 871TM-M10NP12-D4
871TM-M20NP18-A2, 871TM-M20NP18-D4
871TM-M40NP30-A2, 871TM-M40NP30-D4
871TM-N6NP8-D4, 871TM-N6NP8-P3
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
224
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
871TM
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_871TM-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_871TM-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
871TM
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Object
Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
871TM
1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_871TM_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_8IOL_(3.2)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
225
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
2. Apply the following Channel Configuration for 871TM.
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
226
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 871TM, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 871TM
Sensor.
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 871TM sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
227
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
228
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_871TM_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inf_Lookup_HEX
List Entry for Timer and Multiplier
Selection
raC_UDT_Hex_Code_LookupMember[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_871TM_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_871TM_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChXTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_BaseTime
Set Time Base for setting delay; 0= 0.1 ms, 1 = 0.4 ms, 2 = 1.6 ms,
3 = 6.4 ms
INT
Cfg_Enable
Set for Enabling Timer Modes; 0 = ON, 1 = OFF
DINT
Cfg_TimerMode
Set the Timer Mode; 0 = No Timer, 1 = Off Delay, 2 = On Delay, 3 = On Delay SINT
and Off Delay
Set_Multiplier
Set Multiplier for setting delay; 0 to 63
Cmd_ResetDurations Duration Reset Command
INT
BOOL
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
229
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Val_BaseTime
Value for Time Base for setting delay; 0= 0.1 ms, 1 = 0.4 ms, 2 = 1.6 INT
ms, 3 = 6.4 ms
Val_Enable
Value for Enabling Timer Modes; 0 = ON, 1 = OFF
DINT
Val_Counter
Sensor Counter Value
INT
Val_TimerMode
Value of the Timer Mode; 0 = No Timer, 1 = Off Delay, 2 = On Delay, 3 INT
= On Delay and Off Delay
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Actual internal Sensor Temperature
Sts_InhibitCfg
BOOL
REAL
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception Maximum internal sensor temperature over whole sensor lifetime REAL
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
230
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_871TM_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_871TM_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChXTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_BaseTime
Set Time Base for setting delay; 0= 0.1 ms, 1 = 0.4 ms, 2 = 1.6 ms,
3 = 6.4 ms
INT
Cfg_Enable
Set for Enabling Timer Modes; 0 = ON, 1 = OFF
DINT
Cfg_TimerMode
Set the Timer Mode; 0 = No Timer, 1 = Off Delay, 2 = On Delay, 3 = On
Delay and Off Delay
SINT
Set_Multiplier
Set Multiplier for setting delay; 0 to 63
INT
Cmd_ApplyConfigurati Module reconfigure Command
on
BOOL
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
231
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Output
Sts_InhibitCmd
Function/Descritpion
DataType
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate; BOOL
0=Allow
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate; BOOL
0=Allow
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_BaseTime
Value for Time Base for setting delay; 0= 0.1 ms, 1 = 0.4 ms, 2 INT
= 1.6 ms, 3 = 6.4 ms
Val_Enable
Value for Enabling Timer Modes; 0 = ON, 1 = OFF
SINT
Val_TimerMode
Value of the Timer Mode; 0 = No Timer, 1 = Off Delay, 2 = On
Delay, 3 = On Delay and Off Delay
SINT
Val_Multiplier
Value of Multiplier for setting delay; 0 to 63
SINT
Sts_InhibitCfg
232
internal sensor temperature over whole sensor
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception Maximum
lifetime
REAL
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
BOOL
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 11
Programming Example
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 871TM device object connected to channel #3 of
a POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #5 of a POINT I/O
adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the 871TM device object connected to channel #1 of
a ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
233
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
The following example uses the 871TM device object connected to channel #14
of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_3.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_IndSens
234
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102:
AOI
Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_871TM
_Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
235
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Sensor Name
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section include Timer Settings.
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
236
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Enable- The enable parameter must be ON to enable the switching timer
mode. In Off mode the timer setting parameters are disable.
Base Time- While sensing the Target if user wants to add Time delay, it is
added with combination of base time and multiplier. Here unit of Base time is
milliseconds. Click on Base Time dropdown selector object to select different
Base times like 0.1, 0.4, 1.6 and 6.4
Multiplier- While counting the object if user wants to add Time delay, it is
added with combination of base time and multiplier. This parameter allows
you to enter the Multiplier values.
Mode- The switching timer is a useful function for manipulating the output of
the sensor in relation to timing. It is useful for precision applications where
the output of the sensor must be precisely triggered at a certain time. Click on
Mode drop-down selector object to select different Timer modes like No Timer,
Off Delay, On Delay and On Delay and Off Delay
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
237
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
3
2
4
238
5
6
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
239
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_871TM_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
240
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
Select the sensor series (i.e. 871TM), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
SensorType
871TM-M10NP18-A2
871TM-M10NP18-A2 871TM-M10NP18-A2
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI type
of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or Type3)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 11
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL
raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL
raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032
raC_Dvc_871TM_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_871TM
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_871TM-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_871TM
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_871TM-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
241
Chapter 11
242
871TM - Tubular Stainless Steel Sensor (raC_Dvc_871TM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_871TM_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor
(raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Overview
The 45CRM Color Registration Mark Sensor device object
(raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
includes HMI faceplates which displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_45CRM_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
•
Functional Description
Profile selection: Profile setup will allow the operators to set the one of
the profile from five. Each profile contains the Mark & Background
Color value required for the sensor output to turn ON upon target
detection.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
Teach: Offers the different teach functions.
The 45CRM Color Registration Mark Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplate's for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
243
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with
three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
Compatible IO-Link
Sensor
45CRM-4LHT1-D4,
45CRM-4LHT2-D4
45CRM-4LHT1-D4,
45CRM-4LHT2-D4
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
45CRM-4LHT1-D4,
45CRM-4LHT2-D4
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
Compatible IO-Link Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
45CRM
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
45CRM
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
244
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_45CRM-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_45CRM-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
45CRM
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Object
Master
POINT I/O
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1734-4IOL
Link_raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL_(3.2)
ArmorBlock
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO45CRM
1732E-8IOLM12R
Link_raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A (RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_45CRM_5032_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
245
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. WhiteMark_100.
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_45CRM_Type1_50
32,
raC_Dvc_45CRM_Type2_50
32)
246
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 45CRM, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 45CRM
Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
247
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 45CRM sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
248
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_45CRM_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[20]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_45CRM_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_45CRM_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Interfacing Data from Configured Sensors raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
InformationData from Configured Sensors raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChXTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
SINT
Cfg_ProfileSelection
Set value for Profile Selection
SINT
Cmd_DynamicTeach
Dynamic Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_ReadAndStoreSettings
Read and Store Settings Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachBackground Static Teach Background Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachMark
Static Teach Mark Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachEvaluate
Teach Evaluate Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachModeButton
Start Teach Mode Button Command
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
249
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Val_CurrProfile
Displays the Current Profile
SINT
Val_CurrTeachMode
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
INT
Val_OutputPolarityInverted
Displays the Current Profile
INT
Val_ProfileSelection
Displays Teach Mode
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step Value
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_L Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
D
BOOL
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
InOut
250
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_45CRM_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[20]
Code / Description List Entry
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_45CRM_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Interfacing Data from Configured
Sensors
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Information Data from Configured
Sensors
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_45CRM_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChXTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Output Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
SINT
Cfg_ProfileSelection
Set value for Profile Selection
SINT
Cmd_DynamicTeach
Dynamic Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_ReadAndStoreSettings
Read and Store Settings Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachBackground Static Teach Background Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachMark
Static Teach Mark Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachEvaluate
Teach Evaluate Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachModeButton
Start Teach Mode Button Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration
Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Output Data
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
251
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_CurrProfile
Displays the Current Profile
SINT
Val_CurrTeachMode
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
INT
Val_OutputPolarityInverted
Displays the Current Profile
INT
Val_ProfileSelection
Displays Teach Mode
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step Value
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
252
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
Chapter 12
Programming Example
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 45CRM device object connected to channel #3
of a POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module named Point_IO_4IOLMater
in slot #1 of a POINT I/O adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the 45CRM device object connected to channel #0
of a ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
253
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
The following example uses the 45CRM device object connected to channel #2
of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_2.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
GO_LaunchFP
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
GO_LaunchGfx_ColorSens
45CRM
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_45CRM
_Launch
254
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
Faceplates
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
1
5
2
3
6
4
Item
1
2
3
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
255
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Item
4
5
6
Description
Trigger Sparkling Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
Current Profile
Current Profile displays the Current Profile Name and their Mark & Background color code values
which is downloaded/read from/to Sensor
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name or
Locate Toggle Switch require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab
to update the sensor parameters.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into sections:
•
•
•
•
Parameter Settings
Local Settings
Profile Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
1
2
256
3
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Item
1
2
3
Description
Output Polarity: Polarity changes the sensor output to operate as Light On (Non Inverted) and Dark
On (Inverted).
Profile Settings: Launch the Profile settings window.
Local Teach Unlock/Lock Toggle Switch: Locks unauthorized people from changing the sensor
settings using the local device push buttons.Toggle the lock/unlock button to prevent
parameterization using local push buttons.
Profile Settings
Profile Settings display includes the Select Profile dropdown menu to select up
to 5 profiles, Rename Profile and Teach Settings buttons. Touch on the
Rename Profile button to change the profile name e.g. Profile 1- Candy Green.
Note: Profiles are Stored in the Logix Designer and user can select and
download the Profile to the sensor whenever needed.
**** All Profiles values are stored by teaching the Mark and Background color
of that profile using Teach Settings.
Teach Settings
Teach Settings display includes the Teach Methods, Teach Commands & Teach
Read & Store buttons. Touch on the Teach Settings navigation button to access
the Teach Settings tab.
Teach tab includes the following functions:
•
•
•
Teach mode selection drop-down menu (Static/Dynamic)
Teach procedure flow buttons
Teach values Read & Store button
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
257
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
The operator must complete each stage to teach sensor successfully. During
the teach process the operator must complete the current stage prior to the
next stage being made available to operator.
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
Description
Teach Mode:
- Static
- Dynamic
Teach procedure flow buttons
Read & Store: Stored the Mark & background values to the Selected Profile.
Static Teach
The first method is Static Teach, which is intended for applications where the
web can be stopped, or for more challenging applications.
258
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
1. Click on Start Button to Start the Procedure.
2. Place the Mark under the sensor light Spot to teach the color of the
Mark.
3. Click on Teach Mark Button.
4. Place the Background under the sensor light Spot to teach the color of
the Background.
5. Click on Teach Background Button.
6. Click on Evaluate Button.
7. Click on Read and Store Colors Button to store Mark and Background
color values into Profile which is selected in the Profile Setup window.
Dynamic Teach
The Second method is Dynamic Teach, which is intended for applications
where the web can be Running.
1. Click on Start button to Start the procedure.
2. Place the target and background in front of the sensor at the speed of
the application.
3. Click on Dynamic Teach button
4. Click on Evaluate button
5. Click on Read and Store Colors Button to store Mark and Background
color values into Profile which is selected in the Profile Setup window.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
259
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
260
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
1
3
2
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
261
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45CRM_5032
262
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
SensorType
45CRM-4LHT1-D4
45CRM-4LHT1-D4
Select the sensor series (i.e. 45CRM), This name depends upon
the TagName assigned to object.
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
45CRM-4LHT1-D4 type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL
raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL
raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032
raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
263
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
264
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_45CRM
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_45CRM-Faceplate.gfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_45CRM
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_45CRM-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 12
45CRM - Color Registration Mark Sensor (raC_Dvc_45CRM_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45CRM_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
265
Chapter
13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor
(raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Overview
The 836P Solid-State Pressure Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
includes HMI faceplates which displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Process data trending
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_836P_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
The 836P Solid-State Pressure Sensor Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
266
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with four
versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
267
Chapter 13
268
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
Device/
Item
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Compatible IO-Link
Master
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
836P
ArmorBlock 1732E8IOLM12R
Add-On Instruction
836P-D1xxxA14PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxA20PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxA30PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxA36PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxA60PA-D4
836P-D1xxxB10PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxB14PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxB20PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxB25PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxB30PA-D4
836P-D2xxxA14PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxA20PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxA30PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxA36PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxA60PA-D4
836P-D2xxxB10PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxB14PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxB20PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxB25PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxB30PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxB36PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxB50PA-D4
836P-D2xxxC10PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC14PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxC20PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC30PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxC36PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC50PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxC58PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC80PA-D4 raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
836P-D1xxxA14PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxA20PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxA30PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxA36PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxA60PP-D4
836P-D1xxxB10PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxB14PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxB20PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxB25PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxB30PP-D4
836P-D2xxxA14PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxA20PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxA30PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxA36PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxA60PP-D4
836P-D2xxxB10PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxB14PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxB20PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxB25PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxB30PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxB36PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxB50PP-D4
836P-D2xxxC10PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC14PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxC20PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC30PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxC36PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC50PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxC58PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC80PP-D4
836P-D1xxxA14PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxA20PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxA30PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxA36PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxA60PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxB10PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxB14PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxB20PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxB25PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxB30PA-D4
836P-D2xxxA14PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxA20PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxA30PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxA36PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxA60PA-D4
836P-D2xxxB10PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxB14PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxB20PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxB25PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxB30PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxB36PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxB50PA-D4
836P-D2xxxC10PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC14PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxC20PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC30PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxC36PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC50PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxC58PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC80PA-D4
836P-D1xxxA14PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxA20PP-D4, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
836P-D1xxxA30PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxA36PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxA60PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxB10PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxB14PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxB20PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxB25PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxB30PP-D4
836P-D2xxxA14PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxA20PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxA30PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxA36PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxA60PP-D4
836P-D2xxxB10PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxB14PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxB20PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxB25PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxB30PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxB36PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxB50PP-D4
836P-D2xxxC10PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC14PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxC20PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC30PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxC36PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC50PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxC58PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC80PP-D4
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
269
Chapter 13
Device/
Item
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Compatible IO-Link
Master
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
5032-8IOLM12DR
50328IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
836P
5032-8IOLM12DR
50328IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
836P-D1xxxA14PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxA20PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxA30PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxA36PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxA60PA-D4
836P-D1xxxB10PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxB14PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxB20PA-D4, 836P-D1xxxB25PA-D4,
836P-D1xxxB30PA-D4
836P-D2xxxA14PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxA20PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxA30PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxA36PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxA60PA-D4
raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
836P-D2xxxB10PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxB14PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxB20PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxB25PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxB30PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxB36PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxB50PA-D4
836P-D2xxxC10PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC14PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxC20PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC30PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxC36PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC50PA-D4,
836P-D2xxxC58PA-D4, 836P-D2xxxC80PA-D4
836P-D1xxxA14PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxA20PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxA30PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxA36PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxA60PP-D4
836P-D1xxxB10PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxB14PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxB20PP-D4, 836P-D1xxxB25PP-D4,
836P-D1xxxB30PP-D4
836P-D2xxxA14PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxA20PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxA30PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxA36PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxA60PP-D4
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
836P-D2xxxB10PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxB14PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxB20PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxB25PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxB30PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxB36PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxB50PP-D4
836P-D2xxxC10PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC14PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxC20PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC30PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxC36PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC50PP-D4,
836P-D2xxxC58PP-D4, 836P-D2xxxC80PP-D4
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
836P
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_836P-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_836P-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
270
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Device/Item
836P
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Object
Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
1732E-8IOLM12R
836P
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL)
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_836P_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_836P_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_836P_5032_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
271
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. SupplyPressure_100
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_503
2,
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032
)
272
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 836P, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 836P
Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
273
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 836P sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
274
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_836P_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_836P_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_836P_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Function/Description
DataType
Triggered Status When the Pressure is equal to Defined Pressure Set for BOOL
Trigger1
Triggered Status When the Pressure is equal to Defined Pressure Set for BOOL
Trigger2
Inp_ChxPressure
Displays Pressure Value of the Sensor
INT
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxTriggered1
Cfg_DisplayRotation
Set type of Information shown on Unit Display; 0=Current Pressure,
1=Highest Pressure, 2=Low Pressure, 3=Triggered1 Set Pressure,
DINT
4=Triggered1 Reset Pressure, 7=Display OFF
Set type of Information shown on Unit Display; 0=Current Pressure,
1=Highest Pressure, 2=Low Pressure, 3=Triggered1 Set Pressure,
4=Triggered1 Reset Pressure, 5=Triggered2 Set Pressure, 6=Triggered2 DINT
Reset Pressure, 7=Display OFF
Set the change of orientation of the status indicator by 180°; 0=Default, DINT
1=Rotate 180 Degrees
Cfg_MeasuringtUnit
Set Measuring Unit; 0=Bar, 1=Mpa, 2=kPa, 3=psi, 4= kg/cm²
Cfg_DisplayModePA
Cfg_DisplayModePP
DINT
Cfg_OperatingModeTrig1 Set Operating Modes for Triggered1 Output; 0=Hysteresis, 1=Window
INT
Cfg_OperatingModeTrig2 Set Operating Modes for Triggered2 Output; 0=Hysteresis, 1=Window
INT
Cfg_UpdateRate
Set Sensor Display Update Rate; 0=1Hz, 1=2Hz, 2=5 Hz, 3=10Hz
SINT
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Set_TrendPressMaxValue Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
REAL
275
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Input
Function/Description
Set_TrendPressMinValue Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
Set_Trig1OffDelay
Set_Trig1OnDelay
Set_Trig1RP
Set_Trig1SP
Set_Trig2OffDelay
Set_Trig2OnDelay
Set_Trig2RP
Set_Trig2SP
276
DataType
REAL
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the
DINT
Triggered1
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the
DINT
Triggered1
Set the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output OFF for REAL
Trigger1
Set the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output ON for REAL
Trigger1
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the
DINT
Triggered2
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the
DINT
Triggered2
Set the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output OFF for REAL
Trigger2
Set the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output ON for REAL
Trigger2
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_CatPA
Catalog of Connected Sensor; 0=PP, 1=PA
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Val_MeasuringUnit
Displays the Pressure Measurement Unit; 0=Bar, 1=Mpa, 2=kPa, 3=psi, INT
4= kg/cm²
Val_Mode
As per Connected Sensor Catalog
INT
the Total Sensor Operating Hours since the sensor was first DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception Displays
powered ON
INT
Val_OperatingModeTrig2
Displays Operating Modes for Triggered1 Output; 0=Hysteresis,
1=Window
Displays Operating Modes for Triggered2 Output; 0=Hysteresis,
1=Window
Val_Pressure
Displays Pressure Value of the Sensor
REAL
Val_PressureConverted
Displays Converted Pressure Value of the Sensor
REAL
Val_PressureMaxSinceReset
Val_Rotation
Displays Highest Recorded Pressure Value since the last pressure REAL
reset
Displays Lowest Recorded Pressure Value since the last pressure REAL
reset
Displays the change of orientation of the status indicator by 180°; 0=0 INT
Deg, 1=Rotate 180 Degrees
Val_RPRangeMax
Sensor ResetPoint Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMaxUnit
Sensor ResetPoint Unitwise Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMin
Sensor ResetPoint Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMinUnit
Sensor ResetPoint Unitwise Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMax
Sensor SwitchPoint Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMaxUnit
Sensor SwitchPoint Unitwise Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMin
Sensor SwitchPoint Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMinUnit
Sensor SwitchPoint Unitwise Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_OperatingModeTrig1
Val_PressureMinSinceReset
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
INT
277
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Output
Val_Trig2SP
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the DINT
Triggered1
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the DINT
Triggered1
Displays the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger1
Display the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output OFF REAL
for Trigger1
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the DINT
Triggered2
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the DINT
Triggered2
Displays the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger2
Display the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output OFF REAL
for Trigger2
Val_UpdateRate
Displays Sensor Display Update Rate; 0=1Hz, 1=2Hz, 2=5 Hz, 3=10Hz INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
Val_Trig1OffDelay
Val_Trig1OnDelay
Val_Trig1RP
Val_Trig1SP
Val_Trig2OffDelay
Val_Trig2OnDelay
Val_Trig2RP
278
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_503 InOut
2,
Ref_Module
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032 Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
)
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_836P_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_836P_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_836P_Type1_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_836P_Type2_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Function/Description
DataType
Triggered Status When the Pressure is equal to Defined Pressure Set BOOL
for Trigger1
Triggered Status When the Pressure is equal to Defined Pressure Set BOOL
for Trigger2
Inp_ChxPressure
Displays Pressure Value of the Sensor
INT
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxTriggered1
Cfg_DisplayRotation
Set type of Information shown on Unit Display; 0=Current Pressure,
1=Highest Pressure, 2=Low Pressure, 3=Triggered1 Set Pressure,
4=Triggered1 Reset Pressure, 7=Display OFF
Set type of Information shown on Unit Display; 0=Current Pressure,
1=Highest Pressure, 2=Low Pressure, 3=Triggered1 Set Pressure,
4=Triggered1 Reset Pressure, 5=Triggered2 Set Pressure,
6=Triggered2 Reset Pressure, 7=Display OFF
Set the change of orientation of the status indicator by 180°;
0=Default, 1=Rotate 180 Degrees
Cfg_MeasuringtUnit
Set Measuring Unit; 0=Bar, 1=Mpa, 2=kPa, 3=psi, 4= kg/cm²
Cfg_DisplayModePA
Cfg_DisplayModePP
DINT
DINT
DINT
DINT
Cfg_OperatingModeTrig1 Set Operating Modes for Triggered1 Output; 0=Hysteresis, 1=Window
INT
Cfg_OperatingModeTrig2 Set Operating Modes for Triggered2 Output; 0=Hysteresis, 1=Window
INT
Cfg_UpdateRate
Set Sensor Display Update Rate; 0=1Hz, 1=2Hz, 2=5 Hz, 3=10Hz
SINT
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
279
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Set_TrendPressMaxValue Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
REAL
Set_TrendPressMinValue Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
REAL
Set_Trig1OffDelay
Set_Trig1OnDelay
Set_Trig1RP
Set_Trig1SP
Set_Trig2OffDelay
Set_Trig2OnDelay
Set_Trig2RP
Set_Trig2SP
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the
DINT
Triggered1
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the
DINT
Triggered1
Set the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output OFF for REAL
Trigger1
Set the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output ON for REAL
Trigger1
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the
DINT
Triggered2
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the
DINT
Triggered2
Set the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output OFF for REAL
Trigger2
Set the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output ON for REAL
Trigger2
Output Data
280
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_CatPA
Catalog of Connected Sensor; 0=PP, 1=PA
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_MeasuringUnit
Displays the Pressure Measurement Unit; 0=Bar, 1=Mpa, 2=kPa,
3=psi, 4= kg/cm²
INT
Val_Mode
As per Connected Sensor Catalog
INT
the Total Sensor Operating Hours since the sensor was
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception Displays
first powered ON
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Output
DataType
Val_OperatingModeTrig2
Function/Descritpion
Displays Operating Modes for Triggered1 Output; 0=Hysteresis,
1=Window
Displays Operating Modes for Triggered2 Output; 0=Hysteresis,
1=Window
Val_Pressure
Displays Pressure Value of the Sensor
REAL
Val_PressureConverted
Displays Converted Pressure Value of the Sensor
REAL
Val_PressureMaxSinceReset
REAL
Val_Rotation
Displays Highest Recorded Pressure Value since the last pressure
reset
Displays Lowest Recorded Pressure Value since the last pressure
reset
Displays the change of orientation of the status indicator by 180°;
0=0 Deg, 1=Rotate 180 Degrees
Val_RPRangeMax
Sensor ResetPoint Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMaxUnit
Sensor ResetPoint Unitwise Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMin
Sensor ResetPoint Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMinUnit
Sensor ResetPoint Unitwise Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMax
Sensor SwitchPoint Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMaxUnit
Sensor SwitchPoint Unitwise Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMin
Sensor SwitchPoint Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMinUnit
Sensor SwitchPoint Unitwise Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_Trig1OffDelay
Val_Trig2SP
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for DINT
the Triggered1
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for DINT
the Triggered1
Displays the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger1
Display the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger1
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for DINT
the Triggered2
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for DINT
the Triggered2
Displays the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger2
Display the value of system pressure that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger2
Val_UpdateRate
Displays Sensor Display Update Rate; 0=1Hz, 1=2Hz, 2=5 Hz, 3=10Hz INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
Val_OperatingModeTrig1
Val_PressureMinSinceReset
Val_Trig1OnDelay
Val_Trig1RP
Val_Trig1SP
Val_Trig2OffDelay
Val_Trig2OnDelay
Val_Trig2RP
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
INT
INT
REAL
INT
BOOL
281
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 836P device object connected to channel #2 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #1 of a POINT I/O adapter
named Rack01.
The following example uses the 836P device object connected to channel #0 of a
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
282
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
The following example uses the 836P Type1 Sensor device object connected to
channel #14 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_2.
The following example uses the 836P Type2 Sensor device object connected to
channel #0 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_3.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
283
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102:
AOI
Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
Display’s left position (e.g.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description#120:
100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_PresSens
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_836P_
Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
284
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
1
6
2
3
7
4
5
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger1 Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Trigger2 Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
Process Data
- Pressure: Displays the current pressure value along with unit.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name or
Locate Toggle Switch require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab
to update the sensor parameters.
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
285
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
Description
Pressure Bar Graph
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Pressure Current Value
Operating Hours Since Inception
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is power
cycled.
286
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
decisions. One trend is displayed for Pressure.
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Pressure.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into sections:
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
287
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
•
•
•
Parameter Settings
Trigger Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Parameter Settings
Update Rate- The Update rate will allow the operators to change how often the
sensor display is updated. Available options are 1 Hz, 2 Hz, 5 Hz, and 10 Hz. The
default rate is 5 Hz.
Display Mode- The Display Mode will allow the operators to change the type of
information that should be shown on the unit display. Operators can select –
Current Pressure, Highest Pressure, Lowest Pressure, Triggered 1 Set Pressure,
Triggered 1 Reset Pressure, Triggered2 Set Pressure (only available in 2 PNP
models), Triggered2 Reset Pressure (only available in 2 x PNP models) and
Display OFF.
Display Units- This parameter allows you to change the pressure measurement
that is shown in the sensor display. Acceptable units are psi, bar, MPa, kPa, and
kg/cm2. The default display unit for these sensors is psi.
Display Rotation- This parameter allows operators to change the orientation
of the status indicator by 180°. This feature is deal for applications where the
display may be in a direction that’s not visible to the operator and needs to be
rotated for ease of use
Lock/Unlock- This parameter keeps unauthorized people from changing the
sensor settings when using the local push buttons. Toggle the lock/unlock
button to prevent parameterization using local push buttons.
288
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Trigger Settings
The Trigger settings divided into sections:
•
•
Trigger 1 - Visible for Single output sensor
Trigger 2 - Visible for two output sensor
Switch Point- Triggered1 Switch Point/Window High-Condition 1: Sets the
system Pressure that turns the sensor output ON when operating in Hysteresis
Mode. Or turns the sensor output OFF when the system Pressure exceeds the
set value in Window Mode. The operating mode for Triggered1 can be changed
by modifying the Function parameter.
To set the desired Set-point value please refer the pressure range of the 836P
pressure sensor from the user manual
Reset Point- Triggered1 Reset Point/Window Low-Condition 2: Sets the
system Pressure that turns the sensor output OFF when operating in
Hysteresis Mode. Or it turns the sensor output ON when the system Pressure
exceeds the set value in Window Mode. The operating mode for Triggered1 can
be changed by modifying the Function parameter. Touch within the Reset
Point window to change the value. To set the desired Reset point value please
refer the pressure range of the 836P pressure sensor from the user manual.
On Delay- Delays the change of state from OFF to ON for the Triggered1
parameter (Output1 in SIO) for up to 32 seconds when the polarity is defined as
Normally Open. This parameter helps operators filter out unwanted Pressure
peaks in their systems.
Off Delay- Delays the change of state from ON to OFF for the Triggered1
parameter (Output1 in SIO) for up to 32 seconds when the polarity is defined as
Normally Open. This parameter helps operators filter out unwanted Pressure
peaks in their systems.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
289
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Operating Mode- This parameter defines the operating mode for Triggered1
sensor output. The output can be configured to operate in the following
modes.
• Hysteresis Mode: Output1 and the Triggered1 process data parameter turn
ON when the Pressure value is higher than the Switch Point. And turns OFF
when the Pressure value is lower than the reset point.
• Window Mode: Output1 and the Triggered1 process data parameter turn ON
when the Pressure value is between the Switch Point and the Reset Point. It
turns OFF when the Pressure value is higher than the Switch Point or lower
than the Reset Point.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
290
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
291
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
292
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_836P_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_836P_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
Select the sensor series (i.e. 836P), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
ModuleName
[Master5032]
Mod_{ObjectName}
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
293
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
SensorType
836P-D1xxxA14PA-D4
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
836P-D1xxxA14PA-D4836P-D1xxxA14PA-D4 type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL
raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL
raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_836P_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
294
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_836P
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_836P-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_836P
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_836P-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 13
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
295
Chapter 13
296
836P - Solid-State Pressure Sensor (raC_Dvc_836P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_836P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_836P_Type2_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor
(raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Overview
The 837T Solid-State Temperature Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
includes HMI faceplate’s which displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Process data trending
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_837T_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
The 837T Solid-State Temperature Sensor Sensor pre-configured Device
Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
297
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with four
versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item Compatible IO-Link Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
837T
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Compatible IO-Link
Sensor
837T-D3xxxxxxxPA-D4,
837T-D3xxxxxxxPP-D4
837T-D3xxxxxxxPA-D4,
837T-D3xxxxxxxPP-D4
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
837T-D3xxxxxxxPA-D4
raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
837T-D3xxxxxxxPP-D4
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
837T
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
298
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_837T-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_837T-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
837T
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Object
Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
1732E-8IOLM12R
837T
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL)
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_837T_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_837T_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_837T_5032_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
299
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. VesselTemp_100
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_503
2,
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032
)
300
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 837T, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 837T
Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
301
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 837T sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
302
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_837T_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_837T_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_837T_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Function/Description
DataType
Triggered Status When the Temprature is equal to Defined Temperature BOOL
Set for Trigger1
Triggered Status When the Temperature is equal to Defined Temperature BOOL
Set for Trigger2
Inp_ChxTemperature
Displays Temperature Value of the Sensor
INT
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxTriggered1
Cfg_DisplayRotation
Set type of Information shown on Unit Display; 0=Current Temperature,
1=Highest Temperature, 2=Low Temperature, 3=Triggered1 Set
DINT
Temperature, 4=Triggered1 Reset Temperature, 5=Display OFF
Set type of Information shown on Unit Display; 0=Current Temperature,
1=High Temperature, 2=Low Temperature, 3=Triggered1 Set
DINT
Temperature, 4=Triggered1 Reset Temperature, 5=Triggered2 Set
Temperature, 6=Triggered2 Reset Temperature, 7=Display OFF
Set the change of orientation of the status indicator by 180°; 0=Default, DINT
1=Rotate 180 Degrees
Cfg_MeasuringtUnit
Set Measuring Unit; 0=Celsius, 1=Fahrenheit
DINT
Cfg_OperatingModeTrig1 Set Operating Modes for Triggered1 Output; 0=Hysteresis, 1=Window
INT
Cfg_OperatingModeTrig2 Set Operating Modes for Triggered2 Output; 0=Hysteresis, 1=Window
INT
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetTemp
Reset Command for Temperature
BBOL
Cfg_DisplayModePA
Cfg_DisplayModePP
Set_TrendTempMaxValue Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DINT
303
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Input
Function/Description
Set_TrendTempMinValue Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
Set_Trig1OffDelay
Set_Trig1OnDelay
Set_Trig1RP
Set_Trig1SP
Set_Trig2OffDelay
Set_Trig2OnDelay
Set_Trig2RP
Set_Trig2SP
304
DataType
DINT
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the
DINT
Triggered1
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the
DINT
Triggered1
Set the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output OFF for REAL
Trigger1
Set the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output ON for REAL
Trigger1
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the
DINT
Triggered2
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the
DINT
Triggered2
Set the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output OFF for REAL
Trigger2
Set the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output ON for REAL
Trigger2
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_CatPA
Catalog of Connected Sensor; 0=PP, 1=PA
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Val_MeasuringUnit
Displays the Temperature Measurement Unit; 0=Celsius, 1=Fahrenheit INT
Val_Mode
As per Connected Sensor Catalog
INT
the Total Sensor Operating Hours since the sensor was first DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception Displays
powered ON
INT
Val_OperatingModeTrig2
Displays Operating Modes for Triggered1 Output; 0=Hysteresis,
1=Window
Displays Operating Modes for Triggered2 Output; 0=Hysteresis,
1=Window
Val_Temperature
Displays Temperature Value of the Sensor
REAL
Val_ChTemprature
Displays Converted Temperature Value of the Sensor
REAL
Val_OperatingModeTrig1
Highest Recorded Temperature Value since the last
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceReset Displays
Temperature reset
INT
REAL
Lowest Recorded Temperature Value since the last
Val_TemperatureMinSinceReset Displays
REAL
Temperature reset
Displays the change of orientation of the status indicator by 180°; 0=0 INT
Val_Rotation
Deg, 1=Rotate 180 Degrees
Val_RPRangeMax
Sensor ResetPoint Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMaxUnit
Sensor ResetPoint Unitwise Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMin
Sensor ResetPoint Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMinUnit
Sensor ResetPoint Unitwise Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMax
Sensor SwitchPoint Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMaxUnit
Sensor SwitchPoint Unitwise Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMin
Sensor SwitchPoint Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMinUnit
Sensor SwitchPoint Unitwise Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
305
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Output
Val_Trig2SP
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the DINT
Triggered1
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the DINT
Triggered1
Displays the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger1
Display the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger1
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the DINT
Triggered2
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the DINT
Triggered2
Displays the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger2
Display the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output REAL
OFF for Trigger2
Val_UpdateRate
Displays Sensor Display Update Rate; 0=1Hz, 1=2Hz, 2=5 Hz, 3=10Hz INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
Val_Trig1OffDelay
Val_Trig1OnDelay
Val_Trig1RP
Val_Trig1SP
Val_Trig2OffDelay
Val_Trig2OnDelay
Val_Trig2RP
306
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_503 InOut
2,
Ref_Module
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032 Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
)
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_837T_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_837T_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_837T_Type1_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_837T_Type2_Cfg
Input Data
Input
DataType
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Function/Description
Triggered Status When the Temprature is equal to Defined
Temperature Set for Trigger1
Triggered Status When the Temperature is equal to Defined
Temperature Set for Trigger2
Inp_ChxTemperature
Displays Temperature Value of the Sensor
INT
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxTriggered1
BOOL
BOOL
Cfg_DisplayRotation
Set type of Information shown on Unit Display; 0=Current
Temperature, 1=Highest Temperature, 2=Low Temperature,
DINT
3=Triggered1 Set Temperature, 4=Triggered1 Reset Temperature,
5=Display OFF
Set type of Information shown on Unit Display; 0=Current
Temperature, 1=High Temperature, 2=Low Temperature, 3=Triggered1 DINT
Set Temperature, 4=Triggered1 Reset Temperature, 5=Triggered2 Set
Temperature, 6=Triggered2 Reset Temperature, 7=Display OFF
Set the change of orientation of the status indicator by 180°;
DINT
0=Default, 1=Rotate 180 Degrees
Cfg_MeasuringtUnit
Set Measuring Unit; 0=Celsius, 1=Fahrenheit
DINT
Cfg_OperatingModeTrig1 Set Operating Modes for Triggered1 Output; 0=Hysteresis, 1=Window
INT
Cfg_OperatingModeTrig2 Set Operating Modes for Triggered2 Output; 0=Hysteresis, 1=Window
INT
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetTemp
Reset Command for Temperature
BBOL
Cfg_DisplayModePA
Cfg_DisplayModePP
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
307
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Set_TrendTempMaxValue Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendTempMinValue Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_Trig1OffDelay
Set_Trig1OnDelay
Set_Trig1RP
Set_Trig1SP
Set_Trig2OffDelay
Set_Trig2OnDelay
Set_Trig2RP
Set_Trig2SP
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the
DINT
Triggered1
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the
DINT
Triggered1
Set the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output OFF REAL
for Trigger1
Set the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output ON REAL
for Trigger1
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for the
DINT
Triggered2
Set the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for the
DINT
Triggered2
Set the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output OFF REAL
for Trigger2
Set the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor output ON REAL
for Trigger2
Output Data
308
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_CatPA
Catalog of Connected Sensor; 0=PP, 1=PA
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_MeasuringUnit
Displays the Temperature Measurement Unit; 0=Celsius,
1=Fahrenheit
INT
Val_Mode
As per Connected Sensor Catalog
INT
the Total Sensor Operating Hours since the sensor was
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception Displays
first powered ON
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Output
DataType
Val_OperatingModeTrig2
Function/Descritpion
Displays Operating Modes for Triggered1 Output; 0=Hysteresis,
1=Window
Displays Operating Modes for Triggered2 Output; 0=Hysteresis,
1=Window
Val_Temperature
Displays Temperature Value of the Sensor
REAL
Val_ChTemprature
Displays Converted Temperature Value of the Sensor
REAL
Val_OperatingModeTrig1
INT
INT
Highest Recorded Temperature Value since the last
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceReset Displays
Temperature reset
REAL
Lowest Recorded Temperature Value since the last
Val_TemperatureMinSinceReset Displays
Temperature reset
Displays the change of orientation of the status indicator by 180°;
Val_Rotation
0=0 Deg, 1=Rotate 180 Degrees
REAL
Val_RPRangeMax
Sensor ResetPoint Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMaxUnit
Sensor ResetPoint Unitwise Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMin
Sensor ResetPoint Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_RPRangeMinUnit
Sensor ResetPoint Unitwise Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMax
Sensor SwitchPoint Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMaxUnit
Sensor SwitchPoint Unitwise Maximum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMin
Sensor SwitchPoint Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_SPRangeMinUnit
Sensor SwitchPoint Unitwise Minimum Range in Trend
REAL
Val_Trig1OffDelay
Val_Trig2SP
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for DINT
the Triggered1
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for DINT
the Triggered1
Displays the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor
REAL
output OFF for Trigger1
Display the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor
REAL
output OFF for Trigger1
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from ON to OFF for DINT
the Triggered2
Displays the Delay Value for the change of state from OFF to ON for DINT
the Triggered2
Displays the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor
REAL
output OFF for Trigger2
Display the value of system Temperature that turns the sensor
REAL
output OFF for Trigger2
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
Val_Trig1OnDelay
Val_Trig1RP
Val_Trig1SP
Val_Trig2OffDelay
Val_Trig2OnDelay
Val_Trig2RP
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
INT
BOOL
309
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 837T device object connected to channel #0 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #1 of a POINT I/O adapter
named Rack01.
The following example uses the 837T device object connected to channel #1 of a
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
310
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
The following example uses the 837T Type1 Sensor device object connected to
channel #2 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_3.
The following example uses the 837T Type2 Sensor device object connected to
channel #4 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_3.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
311
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102:
AOI
Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
GO_LaunchFP
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
GO_LaunchGfx_TempSens
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_837T_
Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
312
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
1
2
6
3
7
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger1 Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
Process Data
- Temperature: Displays the current Temperature value along with unit.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name or
Locate Toggle Switch require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab
to update the sensor parameters.
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
313
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
Description
Temperature Bar Graph
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Temperature Current Value
Operating Hours Since Inception
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is power
cycled.
314
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
decisions. One trend is displayed for Temperature.
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Temperature.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into sections:
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
315
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
•
•
•
Parameter Settings
Trigger Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Parameter Settings
Display Mode- The Display Mode will allow the operators to change the type of
information that should be shown on the unit display. Operators can select –
Current Temperature, Highest Temperature, Lowest Temperature, Triggered 1
Set Temperature, Triggered 1 Reset Temperature, Triggered2 Set Temperature
(only available in 2 PNP models), Triggered2 Reset Temperature (only available
in 2 x PNP models) and Display OFF.
Display Units- This parameter allows you to change the Temperature
measurement that is shown in the sensor display. Acceptable units are psi, bar,
MPa, kPa, and kg/cm2. The default display unit for these sensors is psi.
Display Rotation- This parameter allows operators to change the orientation
of the status indicator by 180°. This feature is deal for applications where the
display may be in a direction that’s not visible to the operator and needs to be
rotated for ease of use
Lock/Unlock- This parameter keeps unauthorized people from changing the
sensor settings when using the local push buttons. Toggle the lock/unlock
button to prevent parameterization using local push buttons.
Reset High-Low Temperature- This parameter resets the high and low
temperature values stored in the sensor since the last device Reset
316
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Trigger Settings
The Trigger settings divided into sections:
•
•
Trigger 1 - Visible for Single output sensor
Trigger 2 - Visible for two output sensor
Switch Point- Triggered1 Switch Point/Window High-Condition 1: Sets the
system Temperature that turns the sensor output ON when operating in
Hysteresis Mode. Or turns the sensor output OFF when the system
Temperature exceeds the set value in Window Mode. The operating mode for
Triggered1 can be changed by modifying the Function parameter.
To set the desired Set-point value please refer the Temperature range of the
837T Temperature sensor from the user manual
Reset Point- Triggered1 Reset Point/Window Low-Condition 2: Sets the
system Temperature that turns the sensor output OFF when operating in
Hysteresis Mode. Or it turns the sensor output ON when the system
Temperature exceeds the set value in Window Mode. The operating mode for
Triggered1 can be changed by modifying the Function parameter. Touch
within the Reset Point window to change the value. To set the desired Reset
point value please refer the Temperature range of the 837T Temperature
sensor from the user manual.
On Delay- Delays the change of state from OFF to ON for the Triggered1
parameter (Output1 in SIO) for up to 32 seconds when the polarity is defined as
Normally Open. This parameter helps operators filter out unwanted
Temperature peaks in their systems.
Off Delay- Delays the change of state from ON to OFF for the Triggered1
parameter (Output1 in SIO) for up to 32 seconds when the polarity is defined as
Normally Open. This parameter helps operators filter out unwanted
Temperature peaks in their systems.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
317
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Operating Mode- This parameter defines the operating mode for Triggered1
sensor output. The output can be configured to operate in the following
modes.
• Hysteresis Mode: Output1 and the Triggered1 process data parameter turn
ON when the Temperature value is higher than the Switch Point. And turns
OFF when the Temperature value is lower than the reset point.
• Window Mode: Output1 and the Triggered1 process data parameter turn ON
when the Temperature value is between the Switch Point and the Reset Point.
It turns OFF when the Temperature value is higher than the Switch Point or
lower than the Reset Point.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
318
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
319
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
320
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_837T_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_837T_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
Select the sensor series (i.e. 837T), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
ModuleName
[Master5032]
Mod_{ObjectName}
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
321
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
SensorType
837T-D3xxxxxxxPA-D4
the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
837T-D3xxxxxxxPA- 837T-D3xxxxxxxPA-D4 Select
type
of
the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
D4
Type3)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL
raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
322
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_837T
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_837T-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_837T
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_837T-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 14
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
323
Chapter 14
324
837T - Solid-State Temperature Sensor (raC_Dvc_837T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_837T_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_837T_Type2_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light
(raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Overview
The 856T Control Tower Stack Light device object (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032) includes HMI faceplate’s which
displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_856T_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
Functional Description
The 856T Control Tower Stack Light Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplate's for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
325
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with
three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item
856T
Compatible IO-Link Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
856T-B24LC
856T-B24LC
Add-On Instruction
raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
856T-B24LC
raC_Dvc_856T_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_856T_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
856T
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_856T-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_856T-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
856T
326
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Object
Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
856T
1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL)
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_856T_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_856T_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_856T_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_856T_8IOL_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. TowerLight_M100
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
327
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
328
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 856T, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 856T
Sensor.
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 856T sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
329
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
330
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_856T_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_856T_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_856T_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Interface
Control Module1; Bit 0 = Behaviour, Bit 1 =
Behaviour, Bit 2 = Behaviour, Bit 3 = Color/ SINT
Sound, Bit 4 = Color/Sound, Bit 5 = Color/
Sound
Control Module2; Bit 0 = Behaviour, Bit 1 =
Behaviour, Bit 2 = Behaviour, Bit 3 = Color/ SINT
Sound, Bit 4 = Color/Sound, Bit 5 = Color/
Sound
Control Module3; Bit 0 = Behaviour, Bit 1 =
Behaviour, Bit 2 = Behaviour, Bit 3 = Color/ SINT
Sound, Bit 4 = Color/Sound, Bit 5 = Color/
Sound
Control Module4; Bit 0 = Behaviour, Bit 1 =
Behaviour, Bit 2 = Behaviour, Bit 3 = Color/ SINT
Sound, Bit 4 = Color/Sound, Bit 5 = Color/
Sound
Control Module5; Bit 0 = Behaviour, Bit 1 =
Behaviour, Bit 2 = Behaviour, Bit 3 = Color/ SINT
Sound, Bit 4 = Color/Sound, Bit 5 = Color/
Sound
Control Module6; Bit 0 = Behaviour, Bit 1 =
Behaviour, Bit 2 = Behaviour, Bit 3 = Color/ SINT
Sound, Bit 4 = Color/Sound, Bit 5 = Color/
Sound
Control Module7; Bit 0 = Behaviour, Bit 1 =
Behaviour, Bit 2 = Behaviour, Bit 3 = Color/ SINT
Sound, Bit 4 = Color/Sound, Bit 5 = Color/
Sound
Out_ChxControlModule1
Out_ChxControlModule2
Out_ChxControlModule3
Out_ChxControlModule4
Out_ChxControlModule5
Out_ChxControlModule6
Out_ChxControlModule7
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxAlarmStatus
Configure Device Object Input Alarm Status
INT
Set_VibCalibPeriod
Vibration Calibration Period Set Value
REAL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
331
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Set_VibWarningLimitX
Vibration X-axis Warning Limit Set Value
REAL
Set_VibWarningLimitY
Vibration Y-axis Warning Limit Set Value
REAL
Set_VibWarningLimitZ
Vibration Z-axis Warning Limit Set Value
REAL
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput1
Control Output1 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow Flash, INT
3 = Fast Flash
Control Output2 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow Flash, INT
3 = Fast Flash
Control Output3 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow Flash, INT
3 = Fast Flash
Control Output4 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow Flash, INT
3 = Fast Flash
Control Output5 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow Flash, INT
3 = Fast Flash
Control Output6 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow Flash, INT
3 = Fast Flash
Control Output7 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow Flash, INT
3 = Fast Flash
Control Output1 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 = Sound1, INT
9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 = Sound6, 14 =
Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output2 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 = Sound1, INT
9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 = Sound6, 14 =
Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output3 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 = Sound1, INT
9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 = Sound6, 14 =
Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output4 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 = Sound1, INT
9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 = Sound6, 14 =
Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output5 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 = Sound1, INT
9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 = Sound6, 14 =
Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output6 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 = Sound1, INT
9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 = Sound6, 14 =
Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output7 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 = Sound1, INT
9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 = Sound6, 14 =
Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Module Type1; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function Light, 3
= Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash beacon, 6 = INT
Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color beacon, 9 = Piezo
Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 = Recordable Sound
Module Type2; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function Light, 3
= Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash beacon, 6 = INT
Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color beacon, 9 = Piezo
Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 = Recordable Sound
Module Type3; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function Light, 3
= Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash beacon, 6 = INT
Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color beacon, 9 = Piezo
Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 = Recordable Sound
Module Type4; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function Light, 3
= Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash beacon, 6 = INT
Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color beacon, 9 = Piezo
Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 = Recordable Sound
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput2
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput3
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput4
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput5
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput6
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput7
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput1
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput2
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput3
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput4
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput5
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput6
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput7
Cfg_ModuleType1
Cfg_ModuleType2
Cfg_ModuleType3
Cfg_ModuleType4
332
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Input
Cfg_ModuleType5
Cfg_ModuleType6
Cfg_ModuleType7
Function/Description
DataType
Module Type5; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function Light, 3
= Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash beacon, 6 = INT
Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color beacon, 9 = Piezo
Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 = Recordable Sound
Module Type6; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function Light, 3
= Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash beacon, 6 = INT
Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color beacon, 9 = Piezo
Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 = Recordable Sound
Module Type7; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function Light, 3
= Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash beacon, 6 = INT
Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color beacon, 9 = Piezo
Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 = Recordable Sound
Cfg_VibCalibStartStop
Vibration calibration Start/Stop Command
INT
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
333
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
Disable Configuration inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
Disable Command inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
Disable Setting inputs from external sources
BOOL
Val_ClassAVoltage
Class A power supply voltage
REAL
Val_ClassBVoltage
Class B (auxiliary) power supply voltage
REAL
Val_CurrentModuleType1
Val_CurrentModuleType2
Val_CurrentModuleType3
Val_CurrentModuleType4
Val_CurrentModuleType5
Val_CurrentModuleType6
Val_CurrentModuleType7
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
Val_TemperatureCurrent
334
Module Type1; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type2; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type3; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type4; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type5; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type6; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type7; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Indicates the time the IO-link module has been functional since first DINT
powered
Indicates the amount of time the IO-link module has been functional DINT
since last power cycle
Current internal temperature of the IO-Link module since powerup INT
or last power cycle
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Maximum
internal
temperature
of
the
IO-Link
module
since
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp powerup or last power cycle
INT
internal temperature of the IO-Link module since powerup INT
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp Minimum
or last power cycle
Val_VibAvgXAxis
The average vibration value for X-axis
REAL
Val_VibAvgYAxis
The average vibration value for Y-axis
REAL
Val_VibAvgZAxis
The average vibration value for Z-axis
REAL
Val_VibCalibPeriod
Vibration Calibration Period
REAL
Val_VibCalibStatusData
The functional state of the calibration process once activated
SINT
Val_VibMaxLifetimeXAxis
The average vibration value for X-axis
REAL
Val_VibMaxLifetimeYAxis
The average vibration value for Y-axis
REAL
Val_VibMaxLifetimeZAxis
The average vibration value for Z-axis
REAL
Val_VibMaxSPUXAxis
The maximum vibration value for X-axis since powerup
REAL
Val_VibMaxSPUYAxis
The maximum vibration value for Y-axis since powerup
REAL
Val_VibMaxSPUZAxis
The maximum vibration value for Z-axis since powerup
REAL
Val_VibWarningLimitX
Vibration threshold limit value of X-axis
REAL
Val_VibWarningLimitY
Vibration threshold limit value of Y-axis
REAL
Val_VibWarningLimitZ
Vibration threshold limit value of Z-axis
REAL
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
335
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_856T_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_856T_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Out_O
Device Object Output
raC_UDT_IOLink_856T_PdataOut_5032
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_856T_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxAlarmStatus
Configure Device Object Input Alarm Status
INT
Set_VibCalibPeriod
Vibration Calibration Period Set Value
REAL
Set_VibWarningLimitX
Vibration X-axis Warning Limit Set Value
REAL
Set_VibWarningLimitY
Vibration Y-axis Warning Limit Set Value
REAL
Set_VibWarningLimitZ
Vibration Z-axis Warning Limit Set Value
REAL
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput1
Control Output1 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow
Flash, 3 = Fast Flash
Control Output2 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow
Flash, 3 = Fast Flash
Control Output3 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow
Flash, 3 = Fast Flash
Control Output4 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow
Flash, 3 = Fast Flash
Control Output5 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow
Flash, 3 = Fast Flash
Control Output6 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow
Flash, 3 = Fast Flash
Control Output7 Module Behaviors; 0 = OFF, 1 = ON Steady, 2 = Slow
Flash, 3 = Fast Flash
Control Output1 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 =
Sound1, 9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 =
Sound6, 14 = Sound7, 15 = Reserved
INT
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput2
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput3
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput4
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput5
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput6
Cfg_DD1ControlOutput7
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput1
336
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Input
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput2
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput3
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput4
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput5
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput6
Cfg_DD2ControlOutput7
Cfg_ModuleType1
Cfg_ModuleType2
Cfg_ModuleType3
Cfg_ModuleType4
Cfg_ModuleType5
Cfg_ModuleType6
Cfg_ModuleType7
Function/Description
DataType
Control Output2 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 =
INT
Sound1, 9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 =
Sound6, 14 = Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output3 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 =
INT
Sound1, 9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 =
Sound6, 14 = Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output4 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 =
INT
Sound1, 9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 =
Sound6, 14 = Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output5 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 =
INT
Sound1, 9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 =
Sound6, 14 = Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output6 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 =
INT
Sound1, 9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 =
Sound6, 14 = Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Control Output7 Color or Sound; 0 = Red, 1 = Reserved, 2 = Yellow, 3 =
Green, 4 = Blue, 5 = Cyan (Turquoise), 6 = Magenta, 7 = White, 8 =
INT
Sound1, 9 = Sound2, 10 = Sound3, 11 = Sound4, 12 = Sound5, 13 =
Sound6, 14 = Sound7, 15 = Reserved
Module Type1; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function Light,
3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash beacon, 6 = INT
Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color beacon, 9 = Piezo
Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 = Recordable Sound
Module Type2; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color
INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type3; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color
INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type4; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color
INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type5; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color
INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type6; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color
INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type7; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color
INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Cfg_VibCalibStartStop
Vibration calibration Start/Stop Command
INT
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration Module reconfigure Command
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
337
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
Disable Configuration inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
Disable Command inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
Disable Setting inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_ClassAVoltage
Class A power supply voltage
REAL
Val_ClassBVoltage
Class B (auxiliary) power supply voltage
REAL
Val_CurrentModuleType1
Val_CurrentModuleType2
Val_CurrentModuleType3
Val_CurrentModuleType4
Val_CurrentModuleType5
Val_CurrentModuleType6
Val_CurrentModuleType7
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
338
Module Type1; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type2; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type3; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type4; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type5; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type6; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Module Type7; 0 = No Module, 1 = Steady Light, 2 = Multi-function
Light, 3 = Rotating Light, 4 = Multi-color Light, 5 = Steady/Flash
beacon, 6 = Strobe beacon, 7 = Rotating beacon, 8 = Multi-color INT
beacon, 9 = Piezo Electric Sound, 10 = Transducer Sound, 11 =
Recordable Sound
Indicates the time the IO-link module has been functional since DINT
first powered
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
Indicates the amount of time the IO-link module has been
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
functional since last power cycle
Current internal temperature of the IO-Link module since
Val_TemperatureCurrent
powerup or last power cycle
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerU Maximum internal temperature of the IO-Link module since
p
powerup or last power cycle
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerU Minimum internal temperature of the IO-Link module since
p
powerup or last power cycle
DataType
Val_VibAvgXAxis
The average vibration value for X-axis
REAL
Val_VibAvgYAxis
The average vibration value for Y-axis
REAL
Val_VibAvgZAxis
The average vibration value for Z-axis
REAL
Val_VibCalibPeriod
Vibration Calibration Period
REAL
Val_VibCalibStatusData
The functional state of the calibration process once activated
SINT
Val_VibMaxLifetimeXAxis
The average vibration value for X-axis
REAL
Val_VibMaxLifetimeYAxis
The average vibration value for Y-axis
REAL
Val_VibMaxLifetimeZAxis
The average vibration value for Z-axis
REAL
Val_VibMaxSPUXAxis
The maximum vibration value for X-axis since powerup
REAL
Val_VibMaxSPUYAxis
The maximum vibration value for Y-axis since powerup
REAL
Val_VibMaxSPUZAxis
The maximum vibration value for Z-axis since powerup
REAL
Val_VibWarningLimitX
Vibration threshold limit value of X-axis
REAL
Val_VibWarningLimitY
Vibration threshold limit value of Y-axis
REAL
Val_VibWarningLimitZ
Vibration threshold limit value of Z-axis
REAL
Out_ChxControlModule1
Out_ChxControlModule2
Out_ChxControlModule3
Out_ChxControlModule4
Control Module1;
Bit 0 = Behavior,
Bit 1 = Behavior,
Bit 2 = Behavior,
Bit 3 = Color/Sound,
Bit 4 = Color/Sound,
Bit 5 = Color/Sound
Control Module2;
Bit 0 = Behavior,
Bit 1 = Behavior,
Bit 2 = Behavior,
Bit 3 = Color/Sound,
Bit 4 = Color/Sound,
Bit 5 = Color/Sound
Control Module3;
Bit 0 = Behavior,
Bit 1 = Behavior,
Bit 2 = Behavior,
Bit 3 = Color/Sound,
Bit 4 = Color/Sound,
Bit 5 = Color/Sound
Control Module4;
Bit 0 = Behavior,
Bit 1 = Behavior,
Bit 2 = Behavior,
Bit 3 = Color/Sound,
Bit 4 = Color/Sound,
Bit 5 = Color/Sound
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DINT
INT
INT
INT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
339
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Output
Out_ChxControlModule5
Out_ChxControlModule6
Out_ChxControlModule7
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
340
Function/Descritpion
Control Module5;
Bit 0 = Behavior,
Bit 1 = Behavior,
Bit 2 = Behavior,
Bit 3 = Color/Sound,
Bit 4 = Color/Sound,
Bit 5 = Color/Sound
Control Module6;
Bit 0 = Behavior,
Bit 1 = Behavior,
Bit 2 = Behavior,
Bit 3 = Color/Sound,
Bit 4 = Color/Sound,
Bit 5 = Color/Sound
Control Module7;
Bit 0 = Behavior,
Bit 1 = Behavior,
Bit 2 = Behavior,
Bit 3 = Color/Sound,
Bit 4 = Color/Sound,
Bit 5 = Color/Sound
DataType
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
SINT
SINT
Chapter 15
Programming Example
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 856T device object connected to channel #2 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #3 of a POINT I/O adapter
named Rack01.
The following example uses the 856T device object connected to channel #4 of a
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
341
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
The following example uses the 856T device object connected to channel #12 of
a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named Mod_Master5032.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_TempSens
342
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102:
AOI
Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_856T_
Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in View
Designer is used to navigate to the
faceplate in a user application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
343
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
1
4
3
2
Item
1
2
3
4
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Configured module type on Tower Light
Non Configured module type on Tower Light
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
344
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
1
5
6
2
3
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
Description
Temperature Bar Graph
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Temperature Current Value
Operating Hours Since Inception
Operating Hours Since PowerUp
Class A Voltage
Class B Voltage
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is power
cycled.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
345
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Parameter Settings
Module Type- Based on installed module on Tower light user can configure the
module using module type selection. The following options list is available.
1. Steady Light
2. Multi-function Light
3. Rotating Light
4. Multi-color Light
5. Steady/Flashing beacon
6. Strobe beacon
7. Rotating beacon
8. Multi-color beacon
9. Piezo Electric Sounder
10. Transducer Sounder
11. Recordable Sound
Control Output Display Lock/Unlock- The Toggle button is used to Lock and
Unlock the Control Output Display settings. If it is Unlock, then it will allow
the user to choose the Control Output function from the HMI.
Control Output Settings- Based on the light or Sound module connected in
each circuit, the output color and sound can also be configured.
346
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Vibration Setting- To set Vibration indication which used to alert about
unusual mechanical behavior when the IO-Link module detects vibration
above certain threshold values.
Vibration settings divided into sections:
•
•
Calibration
Warning Limit
Calibration Period- The Calibration Period allows you to enter the time in
which the IO-Link module gathers vibration samples to compute and obtain
the vibration thresholds per axis.
Calibration Status- Calibration Status shows the functional state of the
calibration process once activated.
Start, Stop Calibration - To start & Stop the calibration click the button
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
347
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Warning Limit- The Warning Limit for X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis allows you to
enter a desired vibration threshold.
Average- Provides the average vibration value for each X, Y and Z axis.
Maximum Since Power Up- Provides the maximum vibration value for each X,
Y and Z axis, since power up.
Maximum Lifetime- Provides the maximum vibration value for each X, Y and
Z axis, since inception.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
348
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
349
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
350
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
Application Code Manager
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_856T_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_856T_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_856T_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_856T_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
351
Chapter 15
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
Backing Tag
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
Select the sensor series (i.e. 856T), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
SensorType
856T-B24LC
856T-B24LC
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
856T-B24LC
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL
raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL
raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_856T_5032
raC_Dvc_856T_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
352
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 15
Launch Button SE
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_856T
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_856T-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_856T
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_856T-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
353
Chapter 15
354
856T - 856T Control Tower Stack Light (raC_Dvc_856T_4IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_8IOL, raC_Dvc_856T_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor
(raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Overview
The 873P Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
includes HMI faceplate’s which displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Process data trending
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_873P_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
The 873P Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplate's for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplate's. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
355
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with four
versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
356
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
Device/
Item
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Compatible IO-Link
Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
873P
ArmorBlock 1732E8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
873P-D18AI-2200-D5, 873P-D18AI-400-D5,
873P-D18AI-900-D5, 873P-D18AIP2-900-D5,
873P-D18AV-2200-D5, 873P-D18AV-400-D5,
873P-D18AV-900-D5, 873P-D30AI-2500-D5,
873P-D30AI-3500-D5, 873P-D30AI-6000-D5,
873P-D30AIP2-2500-D5, 873P-D30AIP2-3500-D5,
873P-D30AIP2-6000-D5, 873P-D30AV-2500-D5,
873P-D30AV-3500-D5, 873P-D30AV-6000-D5,
873P-D30AVP2-2500-D5, 873P-D30AVP2-3500-D5, raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
873P-D30AVP2-6000-D5
873P-D18P1-2200-D4, 873P-D18P1-400-D4,
873P-D18P1-900-D4, 873P-D18P2-2200-D5,
873P-D18P2-400-D5, 873P-D18P2-900-D5,
873P-D30P1-2500-D4, 873P-D30P1-3500-D4,
873P-D30P1-6000-D4, 873P-D30P2-2500-D5,
873P-D30P2-3500-D5, 873P-D30P2-6000-D5
873P-D18AI-2200-D5, 873P-D18AI-400-D5,
873P-D18AI-900-D5, 873P-D18AIP2-900-D5,
873P-D18AV-2200-D5, 873P-D18AV-400-D5,
873P-D18AV-900-D5, 873P-D30AI-2500-D5,
873P-D30AI-3500-D5, 873P-D30AI-6000-D5,
873P-D30AIP2-2500-D5, 873P-D30AIP2-3500-D5,
873P-D30AIP2-6000-D5, 873P-D30AV-2500-D5,
873P-D30AV-3500-D5, 873P-D30AV-6000-D5,
873P-D30AVP2-2500-D5, 873P-D30AVP2-3500-D5, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
873P-D30AVP2-6000-D5
873P-D18P1-2200-D4, 873P-D18P1-400-D4, 873PD18P1-900-D4, 873P-D18P2-2200-D5,
873P-D18P2-400-D5, 873P-D18P2-900-D5,
873P-D30P1-2500-D4, 873P-D30P1-3500-D4,
873P-D30P1-6000-D4, 873P-D30P2-2500-D5, 873PD30P2-3500-D5, 873P-D30P2-6000-D5
873P-D18AI-2200-D5, 873P-D18AI-400-D5,
873P-D18AI-900-D5, 873P-D18AIP2-900-D5,
873P-D18AV-2200-D5, 873P-D18AV-400-D5,
873P-D18AV-900-D5, 873P-D30AI-2500-D5,
873P-D30AI-3500-D5, 873P-D30AI-6000-D5,
raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032_3.02_ raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
873P-D30AIP2-2500-D5, 873P-D30AIP2-3500-D5, AOI.L5X
873P-D30AIP2-6000-D5, 873P-D30AV-2500-D5,
873P-D30AV-3500-D5, 873P-D30AV-6000-D5,
873P-D30AVP2-2500-D5, 873P-D30AVP2-3500-D5,
873P-D30AVP2-6000-D5
873P-D18P1-2200-D4, 873P-D18P1-400-D4,
873P-D18P1-900-D4, 873P-D18P2-2200-D5,
873P-D18P2-400-D5, 873P-D18P2-900-D5,
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032_3.02_ raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
873P-D30P1-2500-D4, 873P-D30P1-3500-D4,
AOI.L5X
873P-D30P1-6000-D4, 873P-D30P2-2500-D5, 873PD30P2-3500-D5, 873P-D30P2-6000-D5
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
357
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Device/Item
Type
873P
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_873P-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_873P-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
873P
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Object
Master
POINT I/O
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1734-4IOL
Link_raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL_(3.2)
ArmorBlock
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1732E-8IOLM12R
Link_raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL_(3.2)
873P
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO5032-8IOLM12DR
Link_raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Link_raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032_(3.2)
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_873P_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_873P_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_873P_5032_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
358
Device File (.HSL4)
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. DistanceSensor_100
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_503
2,
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032
)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
359
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 873P, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 873P
Sensor.
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 873P sensor.
360
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
Operations
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
361
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_873P_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_873P_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_873P_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Function/Description
DataType
Triggered Status When the Temprature is equal to Defined Temperature BOOL
Set for Trigger1
Triggered Status When the Temperature is equal to Defined Temperature BOOL
Set for Trigger2
Inp_ChxDistance
Displays Distance in mm – non-adjustable
DINT
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel Number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxTemperature
Current Internal Temperature
DINT
Cfg_Filter
Filter; 0= Off, 1= Low, 2= Medium, 3= High
INT
Cfg_T1Mode
Trigger1 Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3= Two Point INT
Cfg_T2Mode
Trigger2 Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3= Two Point INT
Cfg_TeachSp
Teach Setpoint; 0= Set Point1, 1= Set Point2
INT
Cfg_TeachTrigCh
Teach Triggered Channel; 0= Triggered1, 1= Triggered2
SINT
Cmd_AnalogSlope
Analog Output Slope Rising/Falling Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_BGMode
Suppression Mode Reflect/Suppress Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_EnableCounter
Counter Disabled/Enabled Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Disabled/Enabled Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered1
362
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_SoundCone
Sound Cone Width Narrow/Normal Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_T1ActiveLow
Trigger1 Logic High/Low Active Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_T2ActiveLow
Trigger2 Logic High/Low Active Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Cmd
BOOL
Set_AnalogEnd
Analog End Point Set Value
INT
Set_AnalogStart
Analog Start Point Set Value
INT
Set_Suppression
Suppression Mode Set Value
INT
Set_T1Hysteresis
Trigger1 Hysteresis Set Value
INT
Set_T1OffDelay
Trigger1 Switch-Off delay Set Value
INT
Set_T1OnDelay
Trigger1 Switch-On delay Set Value
INT
Set_T1Sp1
Trigger1 SetPoint1 Set Value
INT
Set_T1Sp2
Trigger1 SetPoint2 Set Value
INT
Set_T2Hysteresis
Trigger2 Hysteresis Set Value
INT
Set_T2OffDelay
Trigger2 Switch-Off delay Set Value
INT
Set_T2OnDelay
Trigger2 Switch-On delay Set Value
INT
Set_T2Sp1
Trigger2 SetPoint1 Set Value
INT
Set_T2Sp2
Trigger2 SetPoint2 Set Value
INT
Set_TrendDistMaxValue
Trend Tab Distance Max for VD/ME/SE Faceplate (Below Val_RangeMax) DINT
Set_TrendDistMinValue
Trend Tab Distance Min for VD/ME/SE Faceplate (Above Val_RangeMin) DINT
Set_TrendTempMaxValue Trend Tab Temperature Max for VD/ME/SE Faceplate (-20 To 70)
DINT
Set_TrendTempMinValue Trend Tab Temperature Min for VD/ME/SE Faceplate (-20 To 70)
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
363
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Output Data
364
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_AnalogSlope
Analog Output Slope; 0= Rising, 1= Falling
BOOL
Sts_BGMode
Suppression Mode; 0= Reflection, 1= Suppression
BOOL
Sts_EnableCounter
Counter Enable; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_SoundCone
Sound Cone; 0= Normal, 1= Narrow
BOOL
Sts_T1ActiveLow
Trigger1 Logic Active; 0= Low, 1=High
BOOL
Sts_T2ActiveLow
Trigger2 Logic Active; 0= Low, 1=High
BOOL
Val_AnalogEnd
Analog End Point
INT
Val_AnalogStart
Analog Start Point
INT
Val_Filter
Filter Selected
INT
Val_HysteresisMax
Hysteresis Maximum Selected
DINT
Val_OperatingHours
Operating Hours
INT
Val_PowerCycles
Number of Power Cycle
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Suppression
Suppression Distance
INT
Val_T1Hysteresis
Trigger1 Hysteresis
INT
Val_T1Mode
Trigger1 Operating Mode Selected
INT
Val_T1OffDelay
Trigger1 Switch-Off Delay
INT
Val_T1OnDelay
Trigger1 Switch-On Delay
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_T1Sp1
Trigger1 Setpoint1
INT
Val_T1Sp2
Trigger1 Setpoint2
INT
Val_T2Hysteresis
Trigger2 Hysteresis
INT
Val_T2Mode
Trigger2 Operating Mode Selected
INT
Val_T2OffDelay
Trigger2 Switch-Off Delay
INT
Val_T2OnDelay
Trigger2 Switch-On Delay
INT
Val_T2Sp1
Trigger2 Setpoint1
INT
Val_T2Sp2
Trigger2 Setpoint2
INT
Val_TeachTrig
Teach Trigger Channel Selected
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception Maximum Temperature Since Inception
DINT
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
DINT
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInception Minimum Temperature Since Inception
DINT
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
DINT
Val_TriggerCount
Trigger Counter
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
365
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_503 InOut
2,
Ref_Module
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032 Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
)
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_873P_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_873P_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_873P_Type1_Cfg Or
raC_UDT_IOLink_873P_Type2_Cfg
Input Data
Input
DataType
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Function/Description
Triggered Status When the Temprature is equal to Defined
Temperature Set for Trigger1
Triggered Status When the Temperature is equal to Defined
Temperature Set for Trigger2
Inp_ChxDistance
Displays Distance in mm – non-adjustable
DINT
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel Number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxTemperature
Current Internal Temperature
DINT
Cfg_Filter
Filter; 0= Off, 1= Low, 2= Medium, 3= High
INT
Cfg_T1Mode
INT
Cfg_T2Mode
Trigger1 Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3= Two
Point
Trigger2 Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3= Two
Point
Cfg_TeachSp
Teach Setpoint; 0= Set Point1, 1= Set Point2
INT
Cfg_TeachTrigCh
Teach Triggered Channel; 0= Triggered1, 1= Triggered2
SINT
Cmd_AnalogSlope
Analog Output Slope Rising/Falling Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_BGMode
Suppression Mode Reflect/Suppress Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_EnableCounter
Counter Disabled/Enabled Cmd
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered1
366
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
BOOL
INT
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Disabled/Enabled Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_SoundCone
Sound Cone Width Narrow/Normal Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_T1ActiveLow
Trigger1 Logic High/Low Active Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_T2ActiveLow
Trigger2 Logic High/Low Active Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Set_AnalogEnd
Analog End Point Set Value
INT
Set_AnalogStart
Analog Start Point Set Value
INT
Set_Suppression
Suppression Mode Set Value
INT
Set_T1Hysteresis
Trigger1 Hysteresis Set Value
INT
Set_T1OffDelay
Trigger1 Switch-Off delay Set Value
INT
Set_T1OnDelay
Trigger1 Switch-On delay Set Value
INT
Set_T1Sp1
Trigger1 SetPoint1 Set Value
INT
Set_T1Sp2
Trigger1 SetPoint2 Set Value
INT
Set_T2Hysteresis
Trigger2 Hysteresis Set Value
INT
Set_T2OffDelay
Trigger2 Switch-Off delay Set Value
INT
Set_T2OnDelay
Trigger2 Switch-On delay Set Value
INT
Set_T2Sp1
Trigger2 SetPoint1 Set Value
INT
Set_T2Sp2
Trigger2 SetPoint2 Set Value
INT
Set_TrendDistMaxValue
Trend Tab Distance Max for VD/ME/SE Faceplate (Below
Val_RangeMax)
Trend Tab Distance Min for VD/ME/SE Faceplate (Above
Val_RangeMin)
DINT
Set_TrendDistMinValue
DINT
Set_TrendTempMaxValue Trend Tab Temperature Max for VD/ME/SE Faceplate (-20 To 70)
DINT
Set_TrendTempMinValue Trend Tab Temperature Min for VD/ME/SE Faceplate (-20 To 70)
DINT
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
367
Chapter 16
368
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_AnalogSlope
Analog Output Slope; 0= Rising, 1= Falling
BOOL
Sts_BGMode
Suppression Mode; 0= Reflection, 1= Suppression
BOOL
Sts_EnableCounter
Counter Enable; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_SoundCone
Sound Cone; 0= Normal, 1= Narrow
BOOL
Sts_T1ActiveLow
Trigger1 Logic Active; 0= Low, 1=High
BOOL
Sts_T2ActiveLow
Trigger2 Logic Active; 0= Low, 1=High
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_AnalogEnd
Analog End Point
INT
Val_AnalogStart
Analog Start Point
INT
Val_Filter
Filter Selected
INT
Val_HysteresisMax
Hysteresis Maximum Selected
DINT
Val_OperatingHours
Operating Hours
INT
Val_PowerCycles
Number of Power Cycle
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Suppression
Suppression Distance
INT
Val_T1Hysteresis
Trigger1 Hysteresis
INT
Val_T1Mode
Trigger1 Operating Mode Selected
INT
Val_T1OffDelay
Trigger1 Switch-Off Delay
INT
Val_T1OnDelay
Trigger1 Switch-On Delay
INT
Val_T1Sp1
Trigger1 Setpoint1
INT
Val_T1Sp2
Trigger1 Setpoint2
INT
Val_T2Hysteresis
Trigger2 Hysteresis
INT
Val_T2Mode
Trigger2 Operating Mode Selected
INT
Val_T2OffDelay
Trigger2 Switch-Off Delay
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_T2OnDelay
Trigger2 Switch-On Delay
INT
Val_T2Sp1
Trigger2 Setpoint1
INT
Val_T2Sp2
Trigger2 Setpoint2
INT
Val_TeachTrig
Teach Trigger Channel Selected
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInceptio Maximum Temperature Since Inception
n
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerU Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
p
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInceptio Minimum Temperature Since Inception
n
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerU Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
p
DINT
Val_TriggerCount
Trigger Counter
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DINT
DINT
DINT
369
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference. The first
rung is required and the others are optional.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 873P device object connected to channel #2 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #1 of a POINT I/O adapter
named Rack01.
The following example uses the 873P device object connected to channel #2 of a
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_Master.
370
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
The following example uses the 873P Type 1 Sensor device object connected to
channel #0 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_4.
The following example uses the 873P Type 2 Sensor device object connected to
channel #2 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_4.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
371
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102:
AOI
Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_UltraSens
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_873P_
Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in View
Designer is used to navigate to the
faceplate in a user application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
372
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
1
5
2
3
6
4
7
8
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status 1 & 2
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger1 & 2 Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
Process Data: Displays the Distance value along with unit.
Process Data: Displays the Temperature value along with unit.
Process Data: Displays the Trigger Count value.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
373
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
Description
Device Temperature Bar Graph
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Device Temperature Current Value
Number of Power Cycle
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
decisions. Two trends are displayed. One for Distance and the other for
temperature.
374
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Scaling.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into sections:
•
•
•
•
•
Parameter Settings
Trigger Settings
Teach Settings
Reset Counts
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
375
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Parameter Settings
Analog Output Slope- Applied to configure an analog output when the sensor
is operated in the Standard I/O (SIO) mode.
Item
Signal Slope
Start Point
End Point
Description
Use toggle button to select Rising / Falling of Analog signal slope.
•Rising- Analog value increases with increasing distance.
•Falling- Analog value decreases with increasing distance.
Set the Analog Starting Point (ASP) value to define an analog range.
Set the Analog Ending Point (AEP) value to define an analog range.
Signal SettingItem
Description
Click the Filter Dropdown object & choose one of the filter. The filter feature is
Filter
applied for non-static objects such as liquid with a turbulent surface.
Suppression Mode Use toggle button to select the Background reflection / Background Suppression
for the adjustment of the acoustic beam width. A narrow sound cone has around 10%
Sound Cone Width Allows
beam width reduction compared to the normal sound cone.
Local SettingItem
LED’s
Parameter Lock
Trigger Counter
376
Description
Allows you to turn off or disable indicators at operation. Default is ‘enabled.’
Applied to Lock or Unlock the teach button.
• Lock: Teach button which is mounted on device is disabled/locked.
• Unlock: Teach button which is mounted on device is enabled.
Use toggle button to Enable or disable this function. Default is ‘disabled’
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Trigger Settings
Operating Mode- There are four operation modes for each trigger/output
•
•
•
•
Single Point
Window
Two Point
Deactivated
SP1 (Far)- To set Switching point 1 click on input field and enter the value.
SP2 (Near)- To set Switching point 2 click on input field and enter the value.
Hysteresis- To set Hysteresis click on input field and enter the value.
On Delay- The On Delay defines the desired delay for the output to turn ON
once a target has been detected.
Off Delay- The Off Delay defines the desired delay for the output to turn OFF
once a target has left the detection area.
Logic Active- Use the toggle button to select the High Active (Normally Open) /
Low Active (Normally Closed).
Teach Settings1.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Trigger 1 or 2
Select Set Point 1 or 2
Set Background Suppression Distance Value
Press Teach Apply Button
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
377
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
378
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
379
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
380
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_873P_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_873P_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Select the sensor series (i.e. 873P), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
SensorType
873P-D18AI-2200-D5
the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI type
873P-D18AI-2200-D5 873P-D18AI-2200-D5 Select
of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or Type3)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
381
Chapter 16
873P - Analog Output Ultrasonic Sensor (raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL, raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL
raC_Dvc_873P_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL
raC_Dvc_873P_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_873P_Type1_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_873P_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_873P_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
382
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_873P
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_873P-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_873P
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_873P-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector
(raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Overview
The 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector device object
(raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032) includes HMI
faceplate’s which displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor I/O
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_1694_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
•
Functional Description
Provides overall status and device monitoring parameters for power
feed 1694-PMD and each channel controlled by Electronic Circuit
Protection device.
Allows you to change the device parameters offered by 1694 Electronic
Circuit Protection system.
Provides diagnostics parameter information, those parameters
facilitate troubleshooting if device does not work correctly.
The 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector Sensor pre-configured Device
Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplate's for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
383
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with
three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
IO-Link
Device/Item Compatible
Master
1694
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
1694-PFD1244
raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
1694-PFD1244
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
1694-PFD1244
raC_Dvc_1694_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_1694_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL or 8IOL versions of the
Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
1694
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
384
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_1694-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_1694-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
1694
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementa Compatible IO-Link
tion Object Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
1732E-8IOLM12R
1694
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL)
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO-Link_raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL_(3.2) (RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_1694_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO-Link_raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL_(3.2) (RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_1694_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_1694_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_1694_5032_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
385
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. SensorProtection_100
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
386
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 1694 you can find them, in IO-Link
of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 1694 Sensor.
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 1694 sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
387
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
388
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 17
Add-On Instruction I/O
Data(raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL)
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
InOut Data
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_Msg_Read_Index_Sync Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_Msg_Data
Message Configuration Data
raC_UDT_1694_Msg_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
aC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_1694_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_1694_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Out_O
1694_4IOL Out Data
raC_UDT_ItfAD_1694_Out_4IOL
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cfg_ChannelSelection
Select Channel Number
DINT
Cfg_ResetTrip
Trip Reset Alarm
INT
Cmd_PLCControlTrigger Allows user to define if a particular channel can be controlled by PLC BOOL
Cmd_Refresh
Allows user to update values
BOOL
Cmd_ResetAvgMemory
Average Memory Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetFault
Update Channel Values
BOOL
Cmd_ResetMaxMemory
Maximum Memory Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetMinMemory
Minimum Memory Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetTripCounter
Trip Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Set_Triplimit
Allows user to define Current Trip Limit value for adjustable Electronic SINT
Over-current Protection module
Set_WarningLimit
Allows user to define current value (warning limit) for the channel
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
389
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
Disable Configuration inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
Disable Command inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
Disable Setting inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_PLCControlTrigger
Displays if a particular channel is controlled by PLC
BOOL
Val_AvgCurrent
REAL
Val_DeviceType
Provides value of average measured current for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Provides type of each type of Electronic Overcurrent Protection
Module attached to Power Feed
Val_LastTripType
Provides reason of last trip for particular channel
SINT
Val_MaxCurrent
REAL
Val_MinVoltage
Provides value of highest measured current for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Provides value of highest measured voltage for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Provides value of lowest measured current for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Provides value of lowest measured voltage for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Val_PLCControl
PLC Control Status for particular channel
INT
Val_ReqStep
Step Update
INT
Val_TripCounter
Counter Value
DINT
Val_Triplimit
Displays Current Trip Limit value for adjustable
Electronic Overcurrent Protection module
Displays current value (warning limit) for particular channel
when the LED starts blinking
SINT
Val_MaxVoltage
Val_MinCurrent
Val_WarningLimit
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_ Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
DV_LD
Add-On Instruction I/O
Data(raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
390
InOut Data
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DINT
REAL
REAL
REAL
SINT
BOOL
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx_S Message Configuration Read
ync
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Ref_Msg_Data
Message Configuration Data
raC_UDT_1694_Msg_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
aC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_1694_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Out_O
1694_4IOL Out Data
raC_UDT_ItfAD_1694_Out_4IOL
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_1694_Cfg
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
MESSAGE
391
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cfg_ChannelSelection
Select Channel Number
DINT
Cfg_ResetTrip
Trip Reset Alarm
INT
Cmd_PLCControlTrigger Allows user to define if a particular channel can be controlled by PLC BOOL
Cmd_Refresh
Allows user to update values
BOOL
Cmd_ResetAvgMemory
Average Memory Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetFault
Update Channel Values
BOOL
Cmd_ResetMaxMemory
Maximum Memory Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetMinMemory
Minimum Memory Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetTripCounter
Trip Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Set_Triplimit
Allows user to define Current Trip Limit value for adjustable
Electronic Over-current Protection module
SINT
Set_WarningLimit
Allows user to define current value (warning limit) for the channel
SINT
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
Disable Configuration inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
Disable Command inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
Disable Setting inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_PLCControlTrigger
Displays if a particular channel is controlled by PLC
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_AvgCurrent
REAL
Val_DeviceType
Provides value of average measured current for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Provides type of each type of Electronic Overcurrent Protection
Module attached to Power Feed
Val_LastTripType
Provides reason of last trip for particular channel
SINT
Output Data
392
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DINT
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Output
DataType
Val_MinVoltage
Function/Descritpion
Provides value of highest measured current for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Provides value of highest measured voltage for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Provides value of lowest measured current for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Provides value of lowest measured voltage for particular channel
since first power ON or last device reset
Val_PLCControl
PLC Control Status for particular channel
INT
Val_ReqStep
Step Update
INT
Val_TripCounter
Counter Value
DINT
Val_Triplimit
Displays Current Trip Limit value for adjustable
Electronic Overcurrent Protection module
Displays current value (warning limit) for particular channel
when the LED starts blinking
SINT
Val_MaxCurrent
Val_MaxVoltage
Val_MinCurrent
Val_WarningLimit
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_ Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
DV_LD
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
REAL
REAL
REAL
REAL
SINT
BOOL
393
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference. The first
rung is required and the others are optional.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 1694 device object connected to channel #2 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #5 of a POINT I/O adapter
named Rack01.
The following example uses the 1694 device object connected to channel #0 of a
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
394
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
The following example uses the 1694 device object connected to channel #0 of a
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_4.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_MECP
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. #102:
This launch button graphic object allows the user {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
395
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_1694_L
aunch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in View
Designer is used to navigate to the
faceplate in a user application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the basic control functions.
396
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
3
2
4
5
6
1
10
7
8
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
9
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Channel Status- Based on the status of channel, the status indicator changes its color. If the Channel
01 is ON, the indicator turns from gray to blue.
Current- The Current field provides the channel XX current value. Unit ‘A’
Voltage- The Voltage field provides the channel XX voltage value. Unit ‘V’
PLC Control- The Off-On toggle button is used to switch the respective channel On or Off, depending
on the PLC Control mode.
Channel Description- Description field provides feasibility for operator to enter (input field) the
channel descriptions, based on the device connected to respective channel
Channel is not configured (Device is not connected)
Page 1 to 4- The page buttons allow to toggle back and forth between 1 to 16 channel status
information
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Channel Faulted- Channel Faulted Description with yellow rectangle highlighted & Reset button
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
I/O Tab
I/O tab provides the Current and Average voltage value of the each channel.
which helps ensure that sensors are operating correctly. It displays the Trip
counter & Last trip type.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
397
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
1
9
2
8
3
7
4
5
6
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Channel number- Dropdown selector object to select different channels
Minimum Current- Provides value of lowest measured current for channel since first power ON or
last device/statistics reset.
Maximum Current- Provides value of highest measured current for channel since first power ON or
last device reset.
Average Current- Provides value of average measured current for channel since first power ON or
last device reset.
Minimum Voltage- Provides value of lowest measured voltage for channel since first power ON or
last device reset.
Maximum Voltage- Provides value of highest measured voltage for channel since first power ON or
last device reset
Last Trip Type- Last Trip Type provides reason of device trip for each channel, below are the
different reasons:
• Not Triggered
• Channel Short Circuit
• Channel Overload
• Device Internal Fault
Trip Counter- Provides number of trips for channel counted since first device use or last reset
Refresh- Refresh Button to update the values.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the Device parameter settings, Reset buttons as
well as enabling the user to read data from the Device.
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
398
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Parameter Settings
Channel Selection- Used to select different Channel.
Device Type- The Device Type provides information about Electronic
Overcurrent Protection Module type attached to the Power Feed module:
•
•
•
•
1694 IO-Link With 1 Channel, Fixed Current Threshold
1694 IO-Link With 2 Channel, Fixed Current Threshold
1694 IO-Link With 4 Channel, Fixed Current Threshold
1694 IO-Link With 2 Channels, Adjustable Current Threshold
Trip Limit- Trip Limit allows user to define Current Trip Limit value for
adjustable Electronic Overcurrent Protection module. When this value exceeds
in the circuit of each channel, then device will go into trip state.
•
•
For fixed protection modules, this value is read only.
For Adjustable Protection Modules, the trip limit value can be set from
the faceplate.
Warning Limit- Warning Limit allows user to define current value (warning
limit) for the channel.
PLC Control- PLC Control mode allows user to define if a particular channel
can be controlled by PLC.
Reset Button- The Reset Buttons are used to reset the Minimum, Maximum,
Average Value Memory and Trip Counter.
Button
Description
Reset Maximum Value
Memory
Reset Minimum Value
Memory
Reset Average Value
Memory
Allows user to reset maximum value memory of voltage and current statistics for channel. If
channel is controlled by 2-channels module then both channels will be reset
Allows user to reset minimum value memory of voltage and current statistics for channel. If
channel is controlled by 2-channels module then both channels will be reset
Allows user to reset average value memory of voltage and current statistics for channel. If
channel is controlled by 2-channels module then both channels will be reset.
Allows user to reset trip counter for channel. If channel is controlled by 2channels module then both channels will be reset
Reset Trip Counter
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
399
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
400
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
401
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_1694_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_1694_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_1694_8IOL
Parameter Name
402
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 17
Parameter Name
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_1694_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
Select the sensor series (i.e. 1694), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
SensorType
1694-PFD1244
1694-PFD1244
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI type
of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or Type3)
1694-PFD1244
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
403
Chapter 17
1694 - 1694 Modular Electronic Circuit Protector (raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL, raC_Dvc_1694_5032)
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL
raC_Dvc_1694_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL
raC_Dvc_1694_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_1694_5032
raC_Dvc_1694_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Global Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
404
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_1694
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_1694-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_1694
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_1694-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor
(raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032)
Overview
The 45DMS Distance Measurement Sensor device object
(raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032) includes HMI
faceplate’s which displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Process data trending
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_45DMS_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
The 45DMS Distance Measurement Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
405
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with four
versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item
Compatible IO-Link Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
45DMS
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
45DMS_B8LAT1_D4,
45DMS_B8LGT1_D5
45DMS_B8LAT1_D4,
45DMS_B8LGT1_D5
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
45DMS_B8LAT1_D4
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
45DMS_B8LGT1_D5
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
45DMS
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
406
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_45DMS-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_45DMS-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
45DMS
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Object
Master
POINT I/O
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1734-4IOL
Link_raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL_(3.2)
ArmorBlock
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1732E-8IOLM12R
Link_raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL_(3.2)
45DMS
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO5032-8IOLM12DR
Link_raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Link_raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032_(3.2)
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_5032_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
407
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. Distance_100
3. Select the Process Data Input as Triggered1, Triggered2, SignalScore,
Distance, SignalQuality.
Device Definition
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
(raC_Dvc_45PLA_Type1_50 device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
32,
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
raC_Dvc_45PLA_Type2_503
1. Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
2)
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
408
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 45DMS, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 45DMS
Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
409
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 45DMS sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
410
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_45DMS_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_45DMS_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_45DMS_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
DataType
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Function/Description
Triggered Status When the Temprature is equal to Defined
Temperature Set for Trigger1
Triggered Status When the Temperature is equal to Defined
Temperature Set for Trigger2
Inp_ChxDistance
Displays Distance in mm – non-adjustable
INT
Inp_ChxSignalQuality
Signal Quality 0…100%
SINT
Inp_ChxSignalQualityScore
adjustable via index 196(0xC4)
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_AveragingFilter
Averaging Filter; 0 = Disabled, 1…10 = 10...100 Measurements
SINT
Cfg_MeasurementMode
Measurement Mode; 0 = Negative Slope, 1 = Positive Slope
SINT
Cfg_Pin2Input
Pin 2 Input; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
SINT
Cfg_TeachChannel
Teach Channel; 0 or 1 = Triggered 1, 2 = Triggered2
SINT
Cfg_Trig1_OperMode
Trigger1 Operation Mode; 0 = Off, 1 = Hysteresis, 2 = Window, 3 = SINT
Adjustable Hysteresis
Cfg_Trig1_Polarity
Trigger 1 Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
Cfg_Trig2_OperMode
Trigger2 Operation Mode Status; 0 = Off, 1 = Hysteresis, 2 = Window, SINT
3 = Adjustable Hysteresis
Cfg_Trig2_Polarity
Trigger 2 Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
SINT
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered1
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
BOOL
SINT
411
Chapter 18
412
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Teach Cancel Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachDynamic_Start
Teach Dynamic Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachDynamic_Stop
Teach Dynamic Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachPrecision_ShowTarget Teach Precision Show Target Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_Background
Teach Static Background Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_ShowTarget
Teach Static Show Target Command
BOOL
Set_Offset
Enter Offset to define an offset from the current measured value INT
Set_SignalQualityLev
Enter Signal Quality to define level of reflectivity
INT
Set_TrendDistMaxValue
Trend Tab Distance Max for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_TrendDistMinValue
Trend Tab Distance Min for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig1_OFFDelay
Set_Trig1_ONDelay
Enter Trigger1 OFF delay for the Output to turn OFF after target left DINT
Detection Area
Enter Trigger1 ON delay for the Output to turn ON, once target has DINT
been detected
Set_Trig1_SP1
Enter First SetPoint For Triggered1
INT
Set_Trig1_SP2
Enter Second SetPoint For Triggered1
INT
Set_Trig2_OFFDelay
Set_Trig2_ONDelay
Enter Trigger2 OFF delay for the Output to turn OFF after target left DINT
Detection Area
Enter Trigger2 ON delay for the Output to turn ON, once target has DINT
been detected
Set_Trig2_SP1
Enter First SetPoint For Triggered2
INT
Set_Trig2_SP2
Enter Second SetPoint For Triggered2
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Val_AveragingFilter
Averaging Filter Status; 0 = Disabled, 1…10 = 10...100 Measurements INT
Val_MeasurementMode
Measurement Mode Status; 0 = Negative Slope, 1 = Positive Slope INT
Val_Offset
Offset Value to define an offset from the current measured value INT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_Pin2Input
Pin 2 Input Status; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
INT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
INT
Val_SignalQualityLev
Signal Quality Level Value defines level of Reflectivity
INT
Val_TeachChannel
Teach Channel Value; 0 or 1 = Triggered 1, 2 = Triggered2
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Internal Temperature Of Sensor
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception Maximum Temperature Since Inception
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
INT
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInception Minimum Temperature Since Inception
INT
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
INT
Val_Trig1_ONDelay
Trigger1 Operation Mode Status; 0 = Off, 1 = Hysteresis, 2 = Window, INT
3 = Adjustable Hysteresis
Trigger1 OFF delay Value for the Output to turn OFF after target left DINT
Detection Area
Trigger1 ON delay Value for the Output to turn ON, once target has DINT
been detected
Val_Trig1_Polarity
Trigger 1 Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
Val_Trig1_Mode
Val_Trig1_OFFDelay
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
INT
413
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_Trig1_SP1
First SetPoint Value For Triggered1
INT
Val_Trig1_SP2
Second SetPoint Value for Triggered1
INT
Val_Trig2_Mode
Val_Trig2_ONDelay
Trigger2 Operation Mode Status; 0 = Off, 1 = Hysteresis, 2 = Window, INT
3 = Adjustable Hysteresis
Trigger2 OFF delay Value for the Output to turn OFF after target left DINT
Detection Area
Trigger2 ON delay Value for the Output to turn ON, once target has DINT
been detected
Val_Trig2_Polarity
Trigger 2 Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
INT
Val_Trig2_SP1
First SetPoint Value For Triggered2
INT
Val_Trig2_SP2
Second SetPoint Value for Triggered2
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Val_Trig2_OFFDelay
414
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_50 InOut
32,
Ref_Module
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_50 Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
32)
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_45DMS_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_45DMS_Type1_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_45DMS_Type2_Cfg
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_45DMS_Type1_Cfg or
raC_UDT_IOLink_45DMS_Type2_Cfg
Input Data
Input
DataType
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Function/Description
Triggered Status When the Temprature is equal to Defined
Temperature Set for Trigger1
Triggered Status When the Temperature is equal to Defined
Temperature Set for Trigger2
Inp_ChxDistance
Displays Distance in mm – non-adjustable
INT
Inp_ChxSignalQuality
Signal Quality 0…100%
SINT
Inp_ChxSignalQualityScore
adjustable via index 196(0xC4)
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Cfg_AveragingFilter
Averaging Filter; 0 = Disabled, 1…10 = 10...100 Measurements
SINT
Cfg_MeasurementMode
Measurement Mode; 0 = Negative Slope, 1 = Positive Slope
SINT
Cfg_Pin2Input
Pin 2 Input; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
SINT
Cfg_TeachChannel
Teach Channel; 0 or 1 = Triggered 1, 2 = Triggered2
SINT
Cfg_Trig1_OperMode
Trigger1 Operation Mode; 0 = Off, 1 = Hysteresis, 2 = Window, 3 = SINT
Adjustable Hysteresis
Cfg_Trig1_Polarity
Trigger 1 Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
SINT
Cfg_Trig2_OperMode
Trigger2 Operation Mode Status; 0 = Off, 1 = Hysteresis, 2 =
Window, 3 = Adjustable Hysteresis
SINT
Cfg_Trig2_Polarity
Trigger 2 Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
SINT
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered1
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
BOOL
415
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Teach Cancel Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachDynamic_Start
Teach Dynamic Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachDynamic_Stop
Teach Dynamic Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachPrecision_ShowTarget Teach Precision Show Target Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_Background
Teach Static Background Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStatic_ShowTarget
Teach Static Show Target Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration
Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Set_Offset
Enter Offset to define an offset from the current measured value INT
Set_SignalQualityLev
Enter Signal Quality to define level of reflectivity
INT
Set_TrendDistMaxValue
Trend Tab Distance Max for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_TrendDistMinValue
Trend Tab Distance Min for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig1_OFFDelay
Set_Trig1_ONDelay
Enter Trigger1 OFF delay for the Output to turn OFF after target DINT
left Detection Area
Enter Trigger1 ON delay for the Output to turn ON, once target has DINT
been detected
Set_Trig1_SP1
Enter First SetPoint For Triggered1
INT
Set_Trig1_SP2
Enter Second SetPoint For Triggered1
INT
Set_Trig2_OFFDelay
DINT
Set_Trig2_ONDelay
Enter Trigger2 OFF delay for the Output to turn OFF after target
left Detection Area
Enter Trigger2 ON delay for the Output to turn ON, once target
has been detected
Set_Trig2_SP1
Enter First SetPoint For Triggered2
INT
Set_Trig2_SP2
Enter Second SetPoint For Triggered2
INT
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
DINT
Output Data
416
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_AveragingFilter
Averaging Filter Status; 0 = Disabled, 1…10 = 10...100
Measurements
INT
Val_MeasurementMode
Measurement Mode Status; 0 = Negative Slope, 1 = Positive Slope INT
Val_Offset
Offset Value to define an offset from the current measured value INT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_Pin2Input
Pin 2 Input Status; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
INT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
INT
Val_SignalQualityLev
Signal Quality Level Value defines level of Reflectivity
INT
Val_TeachChannel
Teach Channel Value; 0 or 1 = Triggered 1, 2 = Triggered2
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Internal Temperature Of Sensor
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInceptio Maximum Temperature Since Inception
INT
n
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerU Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
INT
p
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInceptio Minimum Temperature Since Inception
INT
n
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerU Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
INT
p
Trigger1 Operation Mode Status; 0 = Off, 1 = Hysteresis, 2 =
Val_Trig1_Mode
INT
Window, 3 = Adjustable Hysteresis
Trigger1 OFF delay Value for the Output to turn OFF after target DINT
Val_Trig1_OFFDelay
left Detection Area
Trigger1 ON delay Value for the Output to turn ON, once target has DINT
Val_Trig1_ONDelay
been detected
Val_Trig1_Polarity
Trigger 1 Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
INT
Val_Trig1_SP1
First SetPoint Value For Triggered1
INT
Val_Trig1_SP2
Second SetPoint Value for Triggered1
INT
Val_Trig2_Mode
INT
Val_Trig2_ONDelay
Trigger2 Operation Mode Status; 0 = Off, 1 = Hysteresis, 2 =
Window, 3 = Adjustable Hysteresis
Trigger2 OFF delay Value for the Output to turn OFF after target
left Detection Area
Trigger2 ON delay Value for the Output to turn ON, once target
has been detected
Val_Trig2_Polarity
Trigger 2 Polarity; 0 = Not Inverted, 1 = Inverted
INT
Val_Trig2_SP1
First SetPoint Value For Triggered2
INT
Val_Trig2_SP2
Second SetPoint Value for Triggered2
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Val_Trig2_OFFDelay
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DINT
DINT
417
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 45DMS device object connected to channel #2
of a POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #1 of a POINT I/O
adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the 45DMS device object connected to channel #6
of a ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
418
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Note: If tags for Triggered1, Triggered2, Signal Quality Score, Distance, and Signal Quality are missing after importing the AOI
into Master 4IOL or 8IOL models, modify the 'Process Input Data' parameter within the AOP.
The following example uses the 45DMS Tyep1 Sensor device object connected
to channel #4 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_2.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
419
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
The following example uses the 45DMS Tyep2 Sensor device object connected
to channel #6 of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_2.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_LightSens
WithData
420
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName}
This launch button graphic object allows the user )
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#104.
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
#102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName}
Graphic button can be used in
)
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#105:Live Data Engineering Unit
diagnostics and a live value is
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
AOG_45PLA
_Launch
Faceplates
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
1
6
2
3
7
4
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
421
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status 1 & 2
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trigger1 Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
Process Data: Displays the current Temperature value along with unit.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
422
Description
Device Temperature Bar Graph
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Device Temperature Current Value
Operating Hours Since Inception
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is power
cycled.
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
decisions. One trend is displayed for Distance.
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Distance.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
423
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into sections:
•
•
•
•
Parameter Settings
Trigger Settings
Teach Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
424
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Parameter Settings
Measurement Mode- The Measurement Mode parameter enables operators to
invert the measurement from Positive slope to Negative Slope.
Averaging Filter- The Averaging Filter parameter allows operators to average
multiple measurements, inside of the sensor with the goal of providing a more
stable measurement.
Pin 2 Input- The pin two Input parameter allows operators to enable or disable
the pin two Input available on catalog number, 45DMS-B8LAT1-D4.
Signal Quality Level- Signal Quality Level accepts values from 10 to 90% and
can help operators understand the level of reflectivity, which may be
acceptable or could affect your application.
Offset- - The Offset parameter allows operators to define an offset from the
current measured value. Operators can choose between -5000 to +5000 as an
offset.
Local Teach- The Local Teach toggle button is used to Enable or disable the
local push button to prevent undesired teach on the sensors.
Trigger Settings
The Trigger settings divided into sections:
•
•
Trigger 1
Trigger 2
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
425
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Operating Mode- The operating mode parameter enables operators to define
the desired output mode for Trigger 1 & Trigger 2. These modes can be
Hysteresis, Window & Adjustable Hysteresis.
Switch Point 1- Switch point 1 defines the first set point value for Trigger 1 &
Trigger 2. The Hysteresis mode uses the value of switch point 1 to determine
when the output will be ON or OFF depending on the Polarity setting. For this
setting, the sensor will only detect objects between the minimum distance and
the set point distance. Any higher reflectivity objects will be ignored beyond
this point.
Switch Point 2- - Switch point 2 defines the second set point value for Trigger 1
& Trigger 2. Switch Point1 & Switch Point2 parameter can accept values
between 60 and 5000 and is expressed in mm. The Window mode uses the
values of switch point 1 and switch point 2 to determine when the output will
be ON or OFF depending on the polarity settings. Only objects between switch
point 1 and switch point 2 will be detected while objects outside of these
distances will be ignored.
Polarity value- The Polarity value can either be Not-Inverted or Inverted. NotInverted means that the output will turn ON when the target is within the
expected set points. Inverted means that the output will turn OFF when the
target is within the expected set points.
On Delay- The On Delay defines the desired delay for the output to turn ON
once a target has been detected.
Off Delay- The Off Delay defines the desired delay for the output to turn OFF
once a target has left the detection area.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
426
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
427
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
428
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
Sensor Type
Select sensor type of 45DMS as per device catalog no.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
raC_LD_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
429
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
TagDescription
RoutineName
{ObjectDescription}
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
[Master5032]
Select the sensor series (i.e. 45DMS), This name depends upon
the TagName assigned to object.
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
SensorType
45DMS_B8LAT1_D4
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
45DMS_B8LAT1_D4 45DMS_B8LAT1_D4 type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL
raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL
raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032 Or
raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type2_5032
raC_Dvc_45DMS_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
430
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 18
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Attachments
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_45DMS
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_45DMS-Faceplate.gfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_45DMS
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_45DMS-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
431
Chapter 18
432
45DMS - Distance Measurement Sensor (raC_Dvc_45DMS_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45DMS_Type1_5032,
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor
(raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Overview
The 46CLR ColorSight True Color Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032) includes HMI faceplate’s which
displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Snapshots of Sensor Parameter
Sensor diagnostics
Process data trending
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_46CLR_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
The 46CLR ColorSight True Color Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplate's for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplate's. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
433
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with
three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item
46CLR
IO-Link
Compatible IO-Link Master Compatible
Sensor
46CLR-D5LAC1-D5,
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
46CLR-D5LAC2-D5,
46CLR-D5LAC3-D5
46CLR-D5LAC1-D5,
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R 46CLR-D5LAC2-D5,
46CLR-D5LAC3-D5
5032-8IOLM12DR
46CLR-D5LAC1-D5,
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
46CLR-D5LAC2-D5,
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
46CLR-D5LAC3-D5
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
46CLR
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
434
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_46CLR-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_46CLR-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
46CLR
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Object
Master
POINT I/O
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1734-4IOL
Link_raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL_(3.2)
ArmorBlock
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO46CLR
1732E-8IOLM12R
Link_raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A (RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_46CLR_5032_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
435
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g.
3. Select the Process Data Input as Triggered, QualityScore, SignalQuality.
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
436
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 46CLR, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 46CLR
Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
437
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 46CLR sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
438
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Write_Index
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_Index
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Write_SubIndex
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Read_SubIndex
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Msg_Sensor_Data
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_46CLR_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_46CLR_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_46CLR_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cfg_DetectionMode
Set the detection mode; 0=Colour Mode, 1=Best Fit Mode
SINT
Cfg_Snapshot
Snapshot Command Storing for Signal Values
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh1 Allows
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel1; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh2 Allows
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel2; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh3 Allows
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel3; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh4 Allows
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel4; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh5 Allows
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel5; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh6 Allows
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel6; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh7 Allows
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel7; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_OperationCh1
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 1; 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled BOOL
Cmd_OperationCh2
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 2; 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
439
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Input
Function/Description
Cmd_OperationCh3
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 3; 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled BOOL
Cmd_OperationCh4
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 4; 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled BOOL
Cmd_OperationCh5
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 5; 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled BOOL
Cmd_OperationCh6
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 6; 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled BOOL
Cmd_OperationCh7
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 7; 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh1
Set the Polarity of Channel 1; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh2
Set the Polarity of Channel 2; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh3
Set the Polarity of Channel 3; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh4
Set the Polarity of Channel 4; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh5
Set the Polarity of Channel 5; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh6
Set the Polarity of Channel 6; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh7
Set the Polarity of Channel 7; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCountCh1
Counter Reset Command for Channel1
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCountCh2
Counter Reset Command for Channel2
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCountCh3
Counter Reset Command for Channel3
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurationsCh1
Duration Reset Command for Channel1
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurationsCh2
Duration Reset Command for Channel2
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurationsCh3
Duration Reset Command for Channel3
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Teach Cancel Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachColorScanStart Teach Color Scan Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachColorScanStop Teach Color Scan Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStandard
Teach Standard Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxSignalQuality
Reflects the strength of the return signal reflected from the target INT
if the signal strength is higher or lower than a defined
Inp_ChxSignalQualityScore Indicate
threshold
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered1
Triggered Status of channel 1 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Triggered Status of channel 2 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered3
Triggered Status of channel 3 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered4
Triggered Status of channel 4 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered5
Triggered Status of channel 5 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered6
Triggered Status of channel 6 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered7
Triggered Status of channel 7of Sensor
BOOL
Set_CounterCh1
Defines the desired number of counts for the discrete output to turn DINT
ON for Ch 01
Defines the desired number of counts for the discrete output to turn DINT
ON for Ch 02
Set_CounterCh2
440
DataType
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Input
Set_CounterCh3
Function/Description
DataType
Defines the desired number of counts for the discrete output to turn DINT
ON for Ch 03
Set_GreenToleranceCh1
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 1 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh2
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 2 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh3
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 3 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh4
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 4 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh5
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 5 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh6
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 6 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh7
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 7 REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh1 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 1
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh2 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 2
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh3 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 3
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh4 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 4
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh5 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 5
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh6 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 6
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh7 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 7
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh1
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 1
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh2
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 2
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh3
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 3
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh4
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 4
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh5
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 5
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh6
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 6
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh7
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 7
REAL
Set_TeachChannel
Select Teach Channel
INT
Set_ToleranceCh1
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 1
INT
Set_ToleranceCh2
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 2
INT
Set_ToleranceCh3
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 3
INT
Set_ToleranceCh4
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 4
INT
Set_ToleranceCh5
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 5
INT
Set_ToleranceCh6
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 6
INT
Set_ToleranceCh7
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 7
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
441
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Val_Blue
Displays the blue component of the color under detection
REAL
Val_BlueSnapshot1
Used for Storing Blue parameter value for snapshot 1
REAL
Val_BlueSnapshot2
Used for Storing Blue parameter value for snapshot 2
REAL
Val_BlueSnapshot3
Used for Storing Blue parameter value for snapshot 3
REAL
Val_Counter
Counter Value
DINT
the number of targets that have been detected since the DINT
Val_DetectionCounterSinceInception Displays
sensor has been in operation
442
Val_DetectionMode
Displays the detection mode; 0=Colour Mode, 1=Best Fit Mode
SINT
Val_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
SINT
Val_Green
Displays the green component of the color under detection
REAL
Val_GreenSnapshot1
Used for Storing Green parameter value for snapshot 1
REAL
Val_GreenSnapshot2
Used for Storing Green parameter value for snapshot 2
REAL
Val_GreenSnapshot3
Used for Storing Green parameter value for snapshot 3
REAL
Val_GreenTolerance
Display the color threshold tolerance for the green color
REAL
Val_Intensity
Displays the intensity of the color under detection
REAL
Val_IntensityEvaluation
Display value of the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
of the color as part of the color detection ; 0=Off, 1=On
INT
Val_IntensitySnapshot1
Used for Storing intensity parameter value for snapshot 1
REAL
Val_IntensitySnapshot2
Used for Storing intensity parameter value for snapshot 2
REAL
Val_IntensitySnapshot3
Used for Storing intensity parameter value for snapshot 3
REAL
Val_IntensityTolerance
Display the value of color threshold tolerance for the intensity
REAL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Output
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Displays the number of hours that the sensor has been continuously DINT
in operation
Val_Operation
Display the operation state of channel; 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled
INT
Val_Polarity
Displays the polarity of channel; 0 = Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Red
Displays the red component of the color under detection
REAL
Val_RedSnapshot1
Used for Storing Red parameter value for snapshot 1
REAL
Val_RedSnapshot2
Used for Storing Red parameter value for snapshot 2
REAL
Val_RedSnapshot3
Used for Storing Red parameter value for snapshot 3
REAL
Val_RedTolerance
Display the value of color threshold tolerance for the respective REAL
color
Val_TeachChannel
Displays the number of channel selected
INT
Val_TeachStatus
Displays the status of Teach mode
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
Displays the internal temperature information available in the
SINT
sensor
the maximum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception Reflects
die of the Sensor since inception
the maximum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp Reflects
die of the sensor since the last power up
the minimum temperature inside of the microprocessor die SINT
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInception Reflects
of the sensor since inception
the minimum temperature inside of the microprocessor die SINT
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp Reflects
of the sensor since the last power up
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Val_Tolerance
Displays the color tolerance levels for Channel
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
443
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_46CLR_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_46CLR_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_46CLR_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cfg_DetectionMode
Set the detection mode; 0=Colour Mode, 1=Best Fit Mode
SINT
Cfg_Snapshot
Snapshot Command Storing for Signal Values
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh Allows the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
1
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel1; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh Allows the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
2
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel2; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh Allows the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
3
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel3; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh Allows the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
4
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel4; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh Allows the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
5
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel5; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh Allows the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
6
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel6; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
Cmd_IntensityEvaluationCh Allows the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
7
of the color as part of the color detection for Channel7; 0=Off, 1=On BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
444
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_OperationCh1
BOOL
Cmd_OperationCh7
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 1; 0=Disabled,
1=Enabled
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 2; 0=Disabled,
1=Enabled
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 3; 0=Disabled,
1=Enabled
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 4; 0=Disabled,
1=Enabled
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 5; 0=Disabled,
1=Enabled
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 6; 0=Disabled,
1=Enabled
Enables or disables the operation of Channel 7; 0=Disabled,
1=Enabled
Cmd_PolarityCh1
Set the Polarity of Channel 1; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh2
Set the Polarity of Channel 2; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh3
Set the Polarity of Channel 3; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh4
Set the Polarity of Channel 4; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh5
Set the Polarity of Channel 5; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh6
Set the Polarity of Channel 6; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_PolarityCh7
Set the Polarity of Channel 7; 0=Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCountCh1
Counter Reset Command for Channel1
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCountCh2
Counter Reset Command for Channel2
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCountCh3
Counter Reset Command for Channel3
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurationsCh1
Duration Reset Command for Channel1
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurationsCh2
Duration Reset Command for Channel2
BOOL
Cmd_ResetDurationsCh3
Duration Reset Command for Channel3
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Teach Cancel Command
BOOL
Cmd_OperationCh2
Cmd_OperationCh3
Cmd_OperationCh4
Cmd_OperationCh5
Cmd_OperationCh6
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Cmd_TeachColorScanStart Teach Color Scan Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachColorScanStop Teach Color Scan Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStandard
Teach Standard Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration
Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxSignalQuality
Reflects the strength of the return signal reflected from the target INT
if the signal strength is higher or lower than a defined
Inp_ChxSignalQualityScore Indicate
threshold
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered1
Triggered Status of channel 1 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Triggered Status of channel 2 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered3
Triggered Status of channel 3 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered4
Triggered Status of channel 4 of Sensor
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
445
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChxTriggered5
Triggered Status of channel 5 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered6
Triggered Status of channel 6 of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered7
Triggered Status of channel 7of Sensor
BOOL
Set_CounterCh1
DINT
Set_CounterCh3
Defines the desired number of counts for the discrete output to
turn ON for Ch 01
Defines the desired number of counts for the discrete output to
turn ON for Ch 02
Defines the desired number of counts for the discrete output to
turn ON for Ch 03
Set_GreenToleranceCh1
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 1 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh2
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 2 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh3
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 3 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh4
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 4 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh5
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 5 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh6
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 6 REAL
Set_GreenToleranceCh7
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the green color for channel 7 REAL
Set_CounterCh2
446
DINT
DINT
Set_IntensityToleranceCh1 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 1
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh2 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 2
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh3 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 3
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh4 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 4
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh5 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 5
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh6 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 6
REAL
Set_IntensityToleranceCh7 Sets the color threshold tolerance for the intensity for channel 7
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh1
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 1
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh2
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 2
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh3
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 3
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh4
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 4
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh5
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 5
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh6
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 6
REAL
Set_RedToleranceCh7
Sets the color threshold tolerance for the red color for channel 7
REAL
Set_TeachChannel
Select Teach Channel
INT
Set_ToleranceCh1
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 1
INT
Set_ToleranceCh2
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 2
INT
Set_ToleranceCh3
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 3
INT
Set_ToleranceCh4
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 4
INT
Set_ToleranceCh5
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 5
INT
Set_ToleranceCh6
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 6
INT
Set_ToleranceCh7
Sets the color tolerance levels for Channel 7
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_Blue
Displays the blue component of the color under detection
REAL
Val_BlueSnapshot1
Used for Storing Blue parameter value for snapshot 1
REAL
Val_BlueSnapshot2
Used for Storing Blue parameter value for snapshot 2
REAL
Val_BlueSnapshot3
Used for Storing Blue parameter value for snapshot 3
REAL
Val_Counter
Counter Value
DINT
Val_DetectionCounterSinceIncepti Displays the number of targets that have been detected since
on
the sensor has been in operation
DINT
Val_DetectionMode
Displays the detection mode; 0=Colour Mode, 1=Best Fit Mode
SINT
Val_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
SINT
Val_Green
Displays the green component of the color under detection
REAL
Val_GreenSnapshot1
Used for Storing Green parameter value for snapshot 1
REAL
Val_GreenSnapshot2
Used for Storing Green parameter value for snapshot 2
REAL
Val_GreenSnapshot3
Used for Storing Green parameter value for snapshot 3
REAL
Val_GreenTolerance
Display the color threshold tolerance for the green color
REAL
Val_Intensity
Displays the intensity of the color under detection
REAL
Val_IntensityEvaluation
Display value of the sensor to consider evaluating the intensity
of the color as part of the color detection ; 0=Off, 1=On
INT
Val_IntensitySnapshot1
Used for Storing intensity parameter value for snapshot 1
REAL
Val_IntensitySnapshot2
Used for Storing intensity parameter value for snapshot 2
REAL
Val_IntensitySnapshot3
Used for Storing intensity parameter value for snapshot 3
REAL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
447
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_IntensityTolerance
Display the value of color threshold tolerance for the intensity
REAL
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Displays the number of hours that the sensor has been
continuously in operation
DINT
Val_Operation
Display the operation state of channel; 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled
INT
Val_Polarity
Displays the polarity of channel; 0 = Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Red
Displays the red component of the color under detection
REAL
Val_RedSnapshot1
Used for Storing Red parameter value for snapshot 1
REAL
Val_RedSnapshot2
Used for Storing Red parameter value for snapshot 2
REAL
Val_RedSnapshot3
Used for Storing Red parameter value for snapshot 3
REAL
Val_RedTolerance
Display the value of color threshold tolerance for the respective REAL
color
Val_TeachChannel
Displays the number of channel selected
INT
Val_TeachStatus
Displays the status of Teach mode
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
Displays the internal temperature information available in the
SINT
sensor
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInceptio Reflects the maximum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
n
die of the Sensor since inception
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerU Reflects the maximum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
p
die of the sensor since the last power up
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInceptio Reflects the minimum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
n
die of the sensor since inception
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerU Reflects the minimum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
p
die of the sensor since the last power up
Val_TemperatureCurrent
448
Val_Tolerance
Displays the color tolerance levels for Channel
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
Programming Example
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference. The first
rung is required and the others are optional.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 46CLR device object connected to channel #2 of
a POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #8 of a POINT I/O
adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the 46CLR device object connected to channel #4 of
a ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
449
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
The following example uses the 46CLR device object connected to channel #10
of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_2.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_ColorSens
46CLR
450
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102:
AOI
Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
AOG_46CLR
_Launch
Faceplates
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
1
2
3
6
4
7
5
8
9
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
451
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status Channel 1 to 7
Trigger1 to 7 Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows trigger ON/OFF status over last 30 seconds
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
Process Data: Displays the Bar graph of Red, Green, Blue and Intensity.
Process Data: Displays the value of Red, Green, Blue and Intensity.
Process Data: Displays the threshold value of Red, Green, Blue and Intensity.
Channel selection 1 to 7
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name or
Locate Toggle Switch require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab
to update the sensor parameters.
Snapshot
The Snapshot tab is used to save up to three independent snapshots of the
color profile. This can be used during commissioning, configuration, or
troubleshooting as a method of saving a color reference of a particular object.
Each snapshot can be assigned a short name using a string entry.
452
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Snapshot 1- Once you click on button under Snapshot1, the value is captured
and stored in the Snapshot1 displays.
Snapshot 2- Once you click on button under Snapshot1, the value is captured
and stored in the Snapshot2 displays.
Snapshot 3- Once you click on button under Snapshot1, the value is captured
and stored in the Snapshot1 displays.
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
453
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
4
4
Description
Internal Temperature Bar Graph
Green Indicators: Min/Max since inception (lifetime)
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Internal Temperature Current Value
Operating Hours Since Inception (lifetime)
Detection Counter Since Inception
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is power
cycled.
454
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Trend Tab
This tab shows trend of Red, Green, Blue and Intensity Values. Also it contains
numeric displays for of Red, Green, Blue and Intensity Values.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into sections:
•
•
•
•
•
Parameter Settings
Trigger Settings
Local Settings
Teach settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
455
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Parameter Settings
We can set the Parameter Settings for each channel separately. Each page
corresponds to each channel 1 through 7. For accessing individual channel,
user need to use the page navigation button.
Analog Output Slope- Applied to configure an analog output when the sensor
is operated in the Standard I/O (SIO) mode. Trigger Settings
Red Threshold- Sets the color threshold tolerance for the respective color. The
default value for this parameter is 1.59 with acceptable values between 0 and
100.
Green Threshold- Sets the color threshold tolerance for the respective color.
The default value for this parameter is 1.59 with acceptable values between 0
and 100.
Intensity Threshold- Sets the color threshold for the intensity. The default
value for this parameter is 1.83 with acceptable values between 0 and 100.
Channel Enable- Enables or disables the operation of the selected channel.
Invert Polarity- Sets the polarity of the of the selected channel. The polarity
could be either not inverted or inverted.
Intensity Evaluation- Enables or disables the sensor to consider evaluating the
intensity of the color as part of the color detection.
Tolerance- Sets the color tolerance levels of the selected channel. The operator
can set zero as the finest tolerance while level nine is the widest tolerance.
Trigger Settings
We can set the Trigger Settings for each channel separately. For accessing
individual channel, user need to use the page navigation button.
Disable/Enable LEDs- This parameter allows operators to turn OFF or turn ON
the User Interface LEDs (green and orange LEDs). This parameter is ideal for
applications where turning OFF the LEDs is desired to accommodate the
application.
Local Teach Parameters - This section allow user to lock / unlock device local
parameterization. Touch Lock/Unlock Toggle switch to Lock Local
Parameterization.
Teach Settings.
Teach Settings display includes the Teach Methods, Teach Command & Teach
Cancel buttons. Touch on the Teach Settings navigation button to access the
Teach Settings tab. We can teach each channel separately. For accessing
individual channel, user need to use the page navigation button.
Teach Tab include the following functions:
456
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
•
•
•
Teach mode selection and Teach Detection mode Dropdown menu
Teach procedure flow buttons
Teach Apply and Cancel Button.
Teach mode- This parameter selects the desired mode.
Color Scan Teach - The first method is Color Scan Teach, enables you to teach
and detect objects with various colors and individual colors to each channel.
4. Place the target in front of the field of view of the sensor and send the
command “Color Scan - Start”. Move the color targets that you want to
teach as needed until all desired colors are presented in the field of view
of the sensor.
5. Send the command “Color Scan - Stop” to stop the color scan process.
6. Send the command “Teach - Apply” to finalize the teach process.
7. To cancel the procedure, you can send the “Teach Cancel” command at
any point.
Standard Teach - The second method is Standard Teach.
8. Place the target in front of the sensor. Send the command “Standard
Teach - Show Color” to start the teach process.
9. Send the command “Teach - Apply” to finalize the teach process
10. To cancel the procedure, you can send the “Teach Cancel” command
at any point.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
457
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
458
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
459
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_46CLR_5032
460
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 19
RoutineName
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
MasterReferance
[Master5032]
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Select the sensor series (i.e. 46CLR), This name depends upon
the TagName assigned to object.
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
SensorType
46CLR-D5LAC1-D5
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
46CLR-D5LAC1-D5 46CLR-D5LAC1-D5 type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL
raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032
raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
461
Chapter 19
46CLR - ColorSight True Color Sensor (raC_Dvc_46CLR_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46CLR_5032)
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
462
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_46CLR
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_46CLR-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_46CLR
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_46CLR-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
20
875L - Capacitive Sensors
(raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Overview
The 875L Capacitive Sensor device object (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032) includes HMI faceplate’s which
displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Process data trending
Sensor configuration and parameters
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_875L_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
The 875L Capacitive Sensor pre-configured Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
463
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with
three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
IO-Link
Device/Item Compatible
Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
875L
ArmorBlock 1732E8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
Add-On Instruction
Rung Import
875L_M16xx30-xx, 875L_M8xx18-xx,
875L_N12xx18-xx, 875L_N25xx30-xx
875L_M16xx30-xx, 875L_M8xx18-xx,
875L_N12xx18-xx, 875L_N25xx30-xx
raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
875L_M16xx30-xx, 875L_M8xx18-xx,
875L_N12xx18-xx, 875L_N25xx30-xx
raC_Dvc_875L_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_875L_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk® View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk® View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/
library folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
875L
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk® View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_875L-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk® View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_875L-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
464
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Device/Item
875L
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Object
Master
POINT I/O
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO1734-4IOL
Link_raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL_(3.2)
ArmorBlock
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO875L
1732E-8IOLM12R
Link_raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A (RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_875L_5032_(3.2)
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_875L_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_875L_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_875L_5032_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
465
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. Tank Level 1001
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 875L you can find them, in IO-Link
of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 875L Sensor.
466
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 875L sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
467
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_875L_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_875L_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_875L_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
468
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChxTriggered1
Status Triggered 1 Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Status Triggered 2 Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxAnalogValue
Analog Value Dielectric Data
INT
Inp_ChxSwitchingSignalChannel1
Status Switching Signal Channel 1Status Switching Signal Channel 1 BOOL
Inp_ChxSwitchingSignalChannel2
Status Switching Signal Channel 2
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxTemperatureAlarm
Status Temperature Alarm
BOOL
Inp_ChxMarginAlarm1
Status Margin Alarm 1
BOOL
Inp_ChxMarginAlarm2
Status Margin Alarm 2
BOOL
Inp_ChxShortCircuit
Status Short Circuit
BOOL
Cfg_AdjustmentMode
Adjustment MethodDrop-Down; 0= Disabled, 1= Trimmer Input, 2= INT
Teach By Wire
Cfg_SensorApplication
Cfg_SSC1_Mode
Sensor Application Drop-Down: 0= Full Scale Range 1= Liquid Level INT
2= Plastic Pellets
SSC1Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3= Two INT
Point
Cfg_SSC1_SwitchingLogic
SSC1 Switching Logic; 0= High Active 1= Low Active
INT
Cfg_SSC2_SwitchingLogic
SSC1 Switching Logic; 0= High Active 1= Low Active
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Input
Cfg_T1_InputSelector
Function/Description
DataType
Trigger1 InputSelector; 0= Deactivated, 1= SSC1, 2= SSC2, 3= Margin INT
Alarm 1 4= Margin Alarm 2 5= Temp Alarm 6= Ext Logic Input
Cfg_T1_LogicalFunction
0= Direct 1= AND 2= OR 3= XOR
Cfg_T1_PhysicalMode
Trigger1 Mode; 0= Disabled Output, 1= PNP, 2= NPN, 3= Push-Pull INT
Cfg_T1_Polarity
Trigger1 Polarity Mode; 0= Not Inverted (N.O.) 1= Inverted (N.C.)
Cfg_T1_TimerMode
Trigger1 Timer Mode; 0= Disabled, 1= T-On Delay, 2= T-Off Delay, 3= INT
T-On/T-Off Delay 4= One-Shot Leading 5= One-Shot Trailing
Cfg_T1_TimerScale
Trigger 1 Timer Scale: 0= Milliseconds 1= Seconds 2= Minutes
Cfg_T2_InputSelector
Trigger2 InputSelector; 0= Deactivated, 1= SSC1, 2= SSC2, 3=
Margin Alarm 1 4= Margin Alarm 2 5= Temp Alarm 6= Ext Logic Input INT
Cfg_T2_LogicalFunction
0= Direct 1= AND 2= OR 3= XOR
Cfg_T2_PhysicalMode
Trigger2 Mode; 0= Disabled Output, 1= PNP, 2= NPN, 3= Push-Pull INT
Cfg_T2_Polarity
Trigger2 Polarity Mode; 0= Not Inverted (N.O.) 1= Inverted (N.C.) SINT
Cfg_T2_TimerMode
Trigger2 Timer Mode; 0= Disabled, 1= T-On Delay, 2= T-Off Delay, INT
3= T-On/T-Off Delay 4= One-Shot Leading 5= One-Shot Trailing
Cfg_T2_TimerScale
Trigger 2 Timer Scale: 0= Milliseconds 1= Seconds 2= Minutes
INT
Cfg_Teach_SSC
Teach SSC Mode; 1= SSC 1 2= SSC 2
INT
Cmd_EnableLED
LED Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_DTStart
SP1 - Dynamic Taech Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_DTStop
SP1 - Dynamic Taech Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_SingleVal
SP1 - Single Value Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_TwoVal_TP1
SP1 - Two Value Trigger Point 1 Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_TwoVal_TP2
SP1 - Two Value Trigger Point 2 Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_DTStart
SP2 - Dynamic Taech Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_DTStop
SP2 - Dynamic Taech Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_SingleVal
SP2 - Single Value Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_TwoVal_TP1
SP2 - Two Value Trigger Point 1 Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_TwoVal_TP2
SP2 - Two Value Trigger Point 2 Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Teach Cancel Command
BOOL
Set_FilterScaler_SP
Filter Scaler Setpoint 1...255
INT
Set_PDC_Data
Process Data Enable Disable Settings
DINT
Set_PDC_EnableDisable_SP
Process data configuration disable enable settings
DINT
Set_SafeLimitSSC1
Safe Limit SSC1 Setpoint 0...100
INT
Set_SafeLimitSSC2
Safe Limit SSC2 Set point 0...100
INT
Set_SparkMaxValueT1
Spark T1 Max value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_SparkMaxValueT2
Spark T2 Max value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
INT
INT
INT
INT
469
Chapter 20
470
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Set_SparkMinValueT1
Spark T1 Min value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_SparkMinValueT2
Spark T2 Min value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_SSC_CH1_Hyst_SP
SSC Channel 1 Hysteresis Setpoint 1...100
INT
Set_SSC_CH1_SP1
SSC Channel 1 Setpoint 1 0...10000
INT
Set_SSC_CH1_SP2
SSC Channel 1 Setpoint 2 0...10000
INT
Set_SSC_CH2_Hyst_SP
SSC Channel 2 Hysteresis Set point 1...100
INT
Set_SSC_CH2_SP1
SSC Channel 2 Setpoint 1 0...10000
INT
Set_SSC_CH2_SP2
SSC Channel 2 Setpoint 2 0...10000
INT
Set_TempHighThreshold
Temperature Threshold High -50...150
INT
Set_TempLowThreshold
Temperature Threshold Low -50...150
INT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend max value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend min value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig1_SP1
SP1 value for trigger 1 Spark trend VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig1_SP2
SP2 value for trigger 1 Spark trend VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig1_TimerValue
Timer value 1 setpoint0…32,767
INT
Set_Trig2_SP1
SP1 value for trigger 2 Spark trend VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig2_SP2
SP1 value for trigger 2 Spark trend VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig2_TimerValue
Timer value 2 setpoint0…32,767
INT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_EnableLED
LED Status, 0=Disable, 1=Enable
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Val_AdjustmentModeEnable
Adjustment Method; 0= Disabled, 1= Trimmer Input, 2= Teach By SINT
Wire
Val_AnalogValueT1
Spark Trigger 1 Analog Value
INT
Val_AnalogValueT2
Spark Trigger 2 Analog Value
INT
Val_FilterScaler_SP
Filter Scaler value
INT
Val_MinutesAbvMaxTemp
Minutes above Maximum Temperature
DINT
Val_MinutesBelMinTemp
Minutes below Minimum Temperature
DINT
Val_NumberPowerCycles
Number of Power Cycles
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
INT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
INT
Val_SafeLimitSSC1_SP
Safe limit SSC1
SINT
Val_SafeLimitSSC2_SP
Safe limit SSC2
SINT
Val_SensorApplicationEnable
Sensor Application; 0= Full Scale Range 1= Liquid Level 2= Plastic SINT
Pellets
Val_SSC_CH1_Hyst
SSC Channel 1 Hysteresis
INT
Val_SSC_CH1_SP1
SSC Channel 1 SP1
INT
Val_SSC_CH1_SP2
SSC Channel 1 SP2
INT
Val_SSC_CH2_Hyst
SSC Channel 2 Hysteresis
INT
Val_SSC_CH2_SP1
SSC Channel 2 SP1
INT
Val_SSC_CH2_SP2
SSC Channel 2 SP2
INT
Val_SSC1_Mode
SSC1 Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3= Two SINT
Point
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
471
Chapter 20
472
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_SSC1_SwitchingLogic
SSC1 Switching Logic; 0= High Active 1= Low Active
SINT
Val_SSC2_Mode
SSC2 Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3= Two SINT
Point
Val_SSC2_SwitchingLogic
SSC2 Switching Logic; 0= High Active 1= Low Active
Val_T1_InputSelector
Trigger1 InputSelector; 0= Deactivated, 1= SSC1, 2= SSC2, 3= Margin SINT
Alarm 1 4= Margin Alarm 2 5= Temp Alarm 6= Ext Logic Input
Val_T1_LogicalFunction
Logical Function T1; 0= Direct 1= AND 2= OR 3= XOR
Val_T1_PhysicalMode
Trigger1 Physical Mode; 0= Disabled Output, 1= PNP, 2= NPN, 3= SINT
Push-Pull
Val_T1_Polarity
Trigger1 Polarity Mode Selected
SINT
Val_T1_Timer
Trigger 1 Timer value
INT
Val_T1_TimerMode
Trigger1 Timer Mode; 0= Disabled, 1= T-On Delay, 2= T-Off Delay, 3= SINT
T-On/T-Off Delay 4= One-Shot Leading 5= One-Shot Trailing
Val_T1_TimerScale
Trigger1 Timer Scale Mode Selected
Val_T2_InputSelector
Trigger2 InputSelector; 0= Deactivated, 1= SSC1, 2= SSC2, 3=
SINT
Margin Alarm 1 4= Margin Alarm 2 5= Temp Alarm 6= Ext Logic Input
Val_T2_LogicalFunction
Logical Function T2; 0= Direct 1= AND 2= OR 3= XOR
Val_T2_PhysicalMode
Trigger2 Physical Mode; 0= Disabled Output, 1= PNP, 2= NPN, 3= SINT
Push-Pull
Val_T2_Polarity
Trigger2 Polarity Mode Selected
SINT
Val_T2_Timer
Trigger 2 Timer value
INT
Val_T2_TimerMode
Trigger 2 Timer Mode; 0= Disabled, 1= T-On Delay, 2= T-Off Delay, SINT
3= T-On/T-Off Delay 4= One-Shot Leading 5= One-Shot Trailing
Val_T2_TimerScale
Trigger2 Timer Scale Mode Selected
SINT
Val_Teach_SSC
Teach SSC Mode Selected
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step Value
INT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Current temperature
INT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception Maximum temperature - All time high
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp Maximum temperature since power up
INT
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInception Minimum temperature - All time low
INT
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp Minimum temperature since power up
INT
Val_TempHighThreshold
Temperature high threshold
INT
Val_TempLowThreshold
Temperature low threshold
INT
Val_Trig1_SP1
First SetPoint Value For Triggered1
INT
Val_Trig1_SP2
Second SetPoint Value for Triggered1
INT
Val_Trig2_SP1
First SetPoint Value For Triggered2
INT
Val_Trig2_SP2
Second SetPoint Value for Triggered2
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_875L_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Set
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensorDiscrete_Cmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[2]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_875L_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_875L_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Inp_ChxTriggered1
Status Triggered 1 Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxTriggered2
Status Triggered 2 Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxAnalogValue
Analog Value Dielectric Data
INT
Inp_ChxSwitchingSignalChannel1
Status Switching Signal Channel 1Status Switching Signal
Channel 1
BOOL
Inp_ChxSwitchingSignalChannel2
Status Switching Signal Channel 2
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxTemperatureAlarm
Status Temperature Alarm
BOOL
Inp_ChxMarginAlarm1
Status Margin Alarm 1
BOOL
Inp_ChxMarginAlarm2
Status Margin Alarm 2
BOOL
Inp_ChxShortCircuit
Status Short Circuit
BOOL
Cfg_AdjustmentMode
Adjustment MethodDrop-Down; 0= Disabled, 1= Trimmer Input,
2= Teach By Wire
INT
Cfg_SensorApplication
Sensor Application Drop-Down: 0= Full Scale Range 1= Liquid
INT
Level 2= Plastic Pellets
SSC1Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3= Two INT
Point
Cfg_SSC1_Mode
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
473
Chapter 20
474
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cfg_SSC1_SwitchingLogic
SSC1 Switching Logic; 0= High Active 1= Low Active
INT
Cfg_SSC2_SwitchingLogic
SSC1 Switching Logic; 0= High Active 1= Low Active
INT
Cfg_T1_InputSelector
Trigger1 InputSelector; 0= Deactivated, 1= SSC1, 2= SSC2, 3=
Margin Alarm 1 4= Margin Alarm 2 5= Temp Alarm 6= Ext Logic
Input
INT
Cfg_T1_LogicalFunction
0= Direct 1= AND 2= OR 3= XOR
INT
Cfg_T1_PhysicalMode
Trigger1 Mode; 0= Disabled Output, 1= PNP, 2= NPN, 3= PushPull
INT
Cfg_T1_Polarity
Trigger1 Polarity Mode; 0= Not Inverted (N.O.) 1= Inverted (N.C.)
INT
Cfg_T1_TimerMode
Trigger1 Timer Mode; 0= Disabled, 1= T-On Delay, 2= T-Off Delay, INT
3= T-On/T-Off Delay 4= One-Shot Leading 5= One-Shot Trailing
Cfg_T1_TimerScale
Trigger 1 Timer Scale: 0= Milliseconds 1= Seconds 2= Minutes
INT
Cfg_T2_InputSelector
Trigger2 InputSelector; 0= Deactivated, 1= SSC1, 2= SSC2, 3=
Margin Alarm 1 4= Margin Alarm 2 5= Temp Alarm 6= Ext Logic
Input
INT
Cfg_T2_LogicalFunction
0= Direct 1= AND 2= OR 3= XOR
INT
Cfg_T2_PhysicalMode
Trigger2 Mode; 0= Disabled Output, 1= PNP, 2= NPN, 3= Push- INT
Pull
Cfg_T2_Polarity
Trigger2 Polarity Mode; 0= Not Inverted (N.O.) 1= Inverted (N.C.) SINT
Cfg_T2_TimerMode
Trigger2 Timer Mode; 0= Disabled, 1= T-On Delay, 2= T-Off Delay, INT
3= T-On/T-Off Delay 4= One-Shot Leading 5= One-Shot Trailing
Cfg_T2_TimerScale
Trigger 2 Timer Scale: 0= Milliseconds 1= Seconds 2= Minutes
INT
Cfg_Teach_SSC
Teach SSC Mode; 1= SSC 1 2= SSC 2
INT
Cmd_EnableLED
LED Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_DTStart
SP1 - Dynamic Taech Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_DTStop
SP1 - Dynamic Taech Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_SingleVal
SP1 - Single Value Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_TwoVal_TP1
SP1 - Two Value Trigger Point 1 Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP1_TwoVal_TP2
SP1 - Two Value Trigger Point 2 Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_DTStart
SP2 - Dynamic Taech Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_DTStop
SP2 - Dynamic Taech Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_SingleVal
SP2 - Single Value Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_TwoVal_TP1
SP2 - Two Value Trigger Point 1 Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_SP2_TwoVal_TP2
SP2 - Two Value Trigger Point 2 Teach Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachCancel
Teach Cancel Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration
Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Set_FilterScaler_SP
Filter Scaler Setpoint 1...255
INT
Set_PDC_Data
Process Data Enable Disable Settings
DINT
Set_PDC_EnableDisable_SP
Process data configuration disable enable settings
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Set_SafeLimitSSC1
Safe Limit SSC1 Setpoint 0...100
INT
Set_SafeLimitSSC2
Safe Limit SSC2 Set point 0...100
INT
Set_SparkMaxValueT1
Spark T1 Max value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_SparkMaxValueT2
Spark T2 Max value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_SparkMinValueT1
Spark T1 Min value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_SparkMinValueT2
Spark T2 Min value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_SSC_CH1_Hyst_SP
SSC Channel 1 Hysteresis Setpoint 1...100
INT
Set_SSC_CH1_SP1
SSC Channel 1 Setpoint 1 0...10000
INT
Set_SSC_CH1_SP2
SSC Channel 1 Setpoint 2 0...10000
INT
Set_SSC_CH2_Hyst_SP
SSC Channel 2 Hysteresis Set point 1...100
INT
Set_SSC_CH2_SP1
SSC Channel 2 Setpoint 1 0...10000
INT
Set_SSC_CH2_SP2
SSC Channel 2 Setpoint 2 0...10000
INT
Set_TempHighThreshold
Temperature Threshold High -50...150
INT
Set_TempLowThreshold
Temperature Threshold Low -50...150
INT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend max value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend min value for VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig1_SP1
SP1 value for trigger 1 Spark trend VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig1_SP2
SP2 value for trigger 1 Spark trend VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig1_TimerValue
Timer value 1 setpoint0…32,767
INT
Set_Trig2_SP1
SP1 value for trigger 2 Spark trend VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig2_SP2
SP1 value for trigger 2 Spark trend VD/ME/SE Faceplate
INT
Set_Trig2_TimerValue
Timer value 2 setpoint0…32,767
INT
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is Ready
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Controller
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Output Data
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
475
Chapter 20
476
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_EnableLED
LED Status, 0=Disable, 1=Enable
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_AdjustmentModeEnable
Adjustment Method; 0= Disabled, 1= Trimmer Input, 2= Teach By SINT
Wire
Val_AnalogValueT1
Spark Trigger 1 Analog Value
INT
Val_AnalogValueT2
Spark Trigger 2 Analog Value
INT
Val_FilterScaler_SP
Filter Scaler value
INT
Val_MinutesAbvMaxTemp
Minutes above Maximum Temperature
DINT
Val_MinutesBelMinTemp
Minutes below Minimum Temperature
DINT
Val_NumberPowerCycles
Number of Power Cycles
DINT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Operating Hours Since Inception
DINT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
INT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
INT
Val_SafeLimitSSC1_SP
Safe limit SSC1
SINT
Val_SafeLimitSSC2_SP
Safe limit SSC2
SINT
Val_SensorApplicationEnable
Sensor Application; 0= Full Scale Range 1= Liquid Level 2= Plastic SINT
Pellets
Val_SSC_CH1_Hyst
SSC Channel 1 Hysteresis
INT
Val_SSC_CH1_SP1
SSC Channel 1 SP1
INT
Val_SSC_CH1_SP2
SSC Channel 1 SP2
INT
Val_SSC_CH2_Hyst
SSC Channel 2 Hysteresis
INT
Val_SSC_CH2_SP1
SSC Channel 2 SP1
INT
Val_SSC_CH2_SP2
SSC Channel 2 SP2
INT
Val_SSC1_Mode
SSC1 Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3= Two SINT
Point
Val_SSC1_SwitchingLogic
SSC1 Switching Logic; 0= High Active 1= Low Active
SINT
Val_SSC2_Mode
SSC2 Mode; 0= Deactivated, 1= Single Point, 2= Window, 3=
Two Point
SINT
Val_SSC2_SwitchingLogic
SSC2 Switching Logic; 0= High Active 1= Low Active
SINT
Val_T1_InputSelector
Trigger1 InputSelector; 0= Deactivated, 1= SSC1, 2= SSC2, 3=
Margin Alarm 1 4= Margin Alarm 2 5= Temp Alarm 6= Ext Logic
Input
SINT
Val_T1_LogicalFunction
Logical Function T1; 0= Direct 1= AND 2= OR 3= XOR
SINT
Val_T1_PhysicalMode
Trigger1 Physical Mode; 0= Disabled Output, 1= PNP, 2= NPN, 3= SINT
Push-Pull
Val_T1_Polarity
Trigger1 Polarity Mode Selected
SINT
Val_T1_Timer
Trigger 1 Timer value
INT
Val_T1_TimerMode
Trigger1 Timer Mode; 0= Disabled, 1= T-On Delay, 2= T-Off Delay, SINT
3= T-On/T-Off Delay 4= One-Shot Leading 5= One-Shot Trailing
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Val_T1_TimerScale
Trigger1 Timer Scale Mode Selected
SINT
Val_T2_InputSelector
Trigger2 InputSelector; 0= Deactivated, 1= SSC1, 2= SSC2, 3=
Margin Alarm 1 4= Margin Alarm 2 5= Temp Alarm 6= Ext Logic
Input
SINT
Val_T2_LogicalFunction
Logical Function T2; 0= Direct 1= AND 2= OR 3= XOR
SINT
Val_T2_PhysicalMode
Trigger2 Physical Mode; 0= Disabled Output, 1= PNP, 2= NPN, 3= SINT
Push-Pull
Val_T2_Polarity
Trigger2 Polarity Mode Selected
SINT
Val_T2_Timer
Trigger 2 Timer value
INT
Val_T2_TimerMode
Trigger 2 Timer Mode; 0= Disabled, 1= T-On Delay, 2= T-Off
Delay, 3= T-On/T-Off Delay 4= One-Shot Leading 5= One-Shot
Trailing
SINT
Val_T2_TimerScale
Trigger2 Timer Scale Mode Selected
SINT
Val_Teach_SSC
Teach SSC Mode Selected
INT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step Value
INT
Val_TemperatureCurrent
Current temperature
INT
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInceptio Maximum temperature - All time high
n
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerU Maximum temperature since power up
p
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInceptio Minimum temperature - All time low
n
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerU Minimum temperature since power up
p
INT
Val_TempHighThreshold
Temperature high threshold
INT
Val_TempLowThreshold
Temperature low threshold
INT
Val_Trig1_SP1
First SetPoint Value For Triggered1
INT
Val_Trig1_SP2
Second SetPoint Value for Triggered1
INT
Val_Trig2_SP1
First SetPoint Value For Triggered2
INT
Val_Trig2_SP2
Second SetPoint Value for Triggered2
INT
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
INT
INT
INT
477
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 875L device object connected to channel #2 of a
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module in slot #13 of a POINT I/O
adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the 875L device object connected to channel #6 of a
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
478
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
The following example uses the 875L device object connected to channel #4 of a
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_4.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_CapSens
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102:
AOI
Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
479
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_875L_
Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in View
Designer is used to navigate to the
faceplate in a user application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
480
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
1
2
5
3
6
4
7
8
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status 1 & 2
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Input
Depending on Input Selector 1 & 2 for Trigger 1 & 2 settings it will displays the
Deactivated, SSC1, SSC2, Margin Alarm 1, Margin Alarm 2, Temperature Alarm, External Logic Input.
Trigger1 & 2 Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows dielectric values (blue) and set-points (gray) over last 30 seconds.
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
Process Data: Displays the current Dielectric value.
Switching Signal CH 1 & 2
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Margin Alarm 1 & 2
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Trend Spark 1 & 2 changed its Spark line (blue) parameter depending on input
selector of trigger 1 & 2. Input selector is selected as a Temperature then Spark Line
(blue) incorporate with current temperature value and Set-points (gray) incorporate
with High & Low threshold value.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name
require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab to update the sensor
parameters.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
481
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
6
7
1
8
2
3
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4
5
Description
Device Temperature Bar Graph
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Green Indicators: Min/Max since inception
Light Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Device Temperature Current Value
Operating Hours Since Inception
Minutes above maximum temperature
Short Circuit
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Number of Power Cycle
Minutes below minimum temperature
Temperature Alarm
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is power
cycled.
482
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
decisions. One trend is displayed for Distance.
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Distance.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
483
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into five pages with Teach Settings:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Parameter Settings
Process Data Enable Settings
Switching Signal Channel Settings
Trigger Settings 1
Trigger Settings 2
Teach Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Parameter Settings
Adjustment Method- The Adjustment Method parameter enables operators to
select local/remote adjustment of Teach sensor. To enable teach from IO-Link
choose it to Disabled.
Sensor Application- Depending on the application operator may select one of
the three presets.
Temperature Alarm- This setting means that the sensor gives an alarm in the
maximum or minimum temperature is exceeded.
484
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Safe ON/OFF Limit- The sensor has a built-in safety margin that helps adjust
the sensing up to the set-points with an additional safe margin. The factory
settings are set to two times the standard hysteresis of the sensor.
Local Settings LEDs- The Local Settings LEDs toggle button is used to Enable
or disable the LED of the device.
Teach Settings- To navigate the Teach Settings operation.
Process Data Enable Settings
Toggle buttons used to enable or access the cyclic process data variable
Switching Signal Channel Settings
Mode- Operator selects the switching behavior used to create more advanced
output.
Switching Logic- High Active or Low active output switching logic.
Set Point 1- Set point 1 defines the first set point value for SSC.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
485
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Set Point 2- Set point 2 defines the second set point value for SSC. Its disabled
when Mode is selected as Single Point.
Hysteresis- In SSC1 and SSC2 - single point mode and in windows mode the
hysteresis can be set 1…100% of the actual switching value.
Trigger 1 settings
Physical Mode- Physical mode has various settings like Deactivated, PNP,
NPN, Push-Pull. It decides the switching outputs operate.
Input Selector- This function block allows you to select any of the signals from
the sensor front to the Channel A or B. Channel A and B: Can select between
SSC1, SSC2, margin alarm 1, margin alarm 2, temperature alarm, and external
input.
Polarity- The Polarity value can either be Not-Inverted or Inverted. NotInverted means that the output will turn ON when the target is within the
expected set points. Inverted means that the output will turn OFF when the
target is within the expected set points.
Logic Function-In the logic function block, the selected signals from the input
selector can be added a logic function directly without using a PLC - which
makes decentralize decisions possible. The logic functions available are AND,
OR, XOR, and gated SR-FF.
Timer Mode- Selects which type of timer function is introduced on the
Switching Output. Any one of the following is possible: T-On Delay, T-Off
Delay, T-On/T-Off Delay, One-Shot Leading, One-Shot Trailing.
Timer Scale- Parameter defines if the delay specified in the Timer delay should
be in milliseconds, seconds, or minutes.
486
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Timer Value- Parameter defines the actual duration of the delay. The delay can
be set to any integer value from 1… 32,767.
Trigger 2 settings
Physical Mode- Physical mode has various settings like Deactivated, PNP,
NPN, Push-Pull, External input (Active high/Pull-down), External input (Active
low/pull up), or External Teach input. It decides the switching outputs operate.
Input Selector- This function block allows you to select any of the signals from
the sensor front to the Channel A or B. Channel A and B: Can select between
SSC1, SSC2, margin alarm 1, margin alarm 2, temperature alarm, and external
input.
Polarity- The Polarity value can either be Not-Inverted or Inverted. NotInverted means that the output will turn ON when the target is within the
expected set points. Inverted means that the output will turn OFF when the
target is within the expected set points.
Logic Function-In the logic function block, the selected signals from the input
selector can be added a logic function directly without using a PLC - which
makes decentralize decisions possible. The logic functions available are AND,
OR, XOR, and gated SR-FF.
Timer Mode- Selects which type of timer function is introduced on the
Switching Output. Any one of the following is possible: T-On Delay, T-Off
Delay, T-On/T-Off Delay, One-Shot Leading, One-Shot Trailing.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
487
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Timer Scale- Parameter defines if the delay specified in the Timer delay should
be in milliseconds, seconds, or minutes.
Timer Value- Parameter defines the actual duration of the delay. The delay can
be set to any integer value from 1… 32,767.
Teach settings
In order to configure the window for teaching operations effectively, there are
several options available. The window encompasses three drop-down menus
that provide users with the flexibility to select the desired configuration for
their specific teaching requirements. Based on the chosen configuration
settings, relevant Teach command buttons are dynamically displayed,
empowering users to initiate the teaching process. It's important to note that
only one button or command remains active at any given time during the teach
operation. Additionally, users have the option to interrupt the teach operation
and cancel the settings by utilizing the dedicated cancel button/command.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
488
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
489
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
490
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
Application Code Manager
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_875L_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_875L_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_875L_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
491
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
Sensor Type
Select sensor type of 875L as per device catalog no.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_875L_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
Select the sensor series (i.e. 875L), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
SensorType
875L-M8xx18-xx
875L-M8xx18-xx
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI type
of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or Type3)
875L-M8xx18-xx
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration
Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
492
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Category
Chapter 20
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL
raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_875L_5032
raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_875L
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_875L-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_875L
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_875L-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
493
Chapter 20
494
875L - Capacitive Sensors (raC_Dvc_875L_4IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_8IOL, raC_Dvc_875L_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier
(raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Overview
The 46DFA small aperture fiber-optic amplifier sensor device object
(raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
includes HMI faceplates which displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Sensor configuration and parameters
Process data trending
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_46DFA_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Setpoint: Setpoint will allow the operators to enter the signal value
required for the sensor output to turn ON upon target detection.
Polarity: This function changes the sensor output to operate as NotInverted (Light Operate) and Inverted (Dark Operate).
The 46DFA small aperture fiber-optic amplifier sensor pre-configured Device
Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
495
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with
three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item
46DFA
Compatible IO-Link Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Compatible IO-Link Sensor Add-On Instruction
46DFA-L2LBT1-xx
raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
46DFA-L2LBT1-xx
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
46DFA-L2LBT1-xx
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk
View ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk® View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE library
folder.
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL or 8IOL versions of the
Add-On Instruction.
Device/Item
Type
46DFA
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Global Object
Global Object
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_46DFA-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_46DFA-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
496
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Device/Item
46DFA
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Object
Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
46DFA
1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL)
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_46DFA_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
497
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. Light 1001
3. Select the Process Data Input as Triggered, Margin, Proximity, Gain,
Signal.
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
498
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 46DFA, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 46DFA
Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
499
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 46DFA sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
500
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_46DFA_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[20]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_46DFA_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_46DFA_Inp_8IOL
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Input Data
Input
Cfg_DisplayIndication
Cfg_DisplayRotation
Cfg_Function
Cfg_LightSource
Cfg_LightSourceAdj
Cfg_LightSourceMode
Cfg_MarginLevelHM
Cfg_MarginLevelLM
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Cfg_Pin2Type
Cfg_ResponseTime
Function/Description
DataType
Display Indication;0 – Standard Indication (Default),1 –
Percentage Indication, 2 – Zero Offset Indication, 3 – Counter SINT
Mode Indication
Display Rotation;
0 – Normal
SINT
1 – Rotate 180°
Function;
1 – Hysteresis,
SINT
2 – Window Mode
Light Source;
0 – Light Source ON (Default)
SINT
1 – Light Source OFF
Light Source Adjustment;
1 – 12…50 µs Settings
SINT
1 – 5…500 µs – 32 ms Settings
Light Source Mode;
0 – Auto (Default)
SINT
1 - Manual
Margin Level – High Multiplier;
0 – 1.2 X (Default), 1 – 1.5 X, 2 – 2.0 X, 3 – 3.0 X, 4 – 4.0 X, 5 – 5.0 SINT
X
Margin Level – Low Multiplier;
SINT
0 – 0.5 X (Default), 1 – 0.6 X, 2 – 0.7 X, 3 – 0.8 X
Output Polarity;
0 – Not Inverted (Default)
SINT
1 – Inverted
Pin 2 type;
SINT
0 – Disabled, 1 – PNP, 2 – NPN
Response Time;
SINT
0 – 50 µS, 1 – 500 µs (Default), 2 – 4 mS, 3 – 32 ms
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
501
Chapter 21
502
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_Cancel
Teach Cancel - Cancels the Teach Process Command
BOOL
Cmd_CountReset
Count Reset
BOOL
Cmd_DynamicTeachStart
Dynamic Teach Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_DynamicTeachStop
Dynamic Teach Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalInterfaceLock
Device Access Locks. Local User Interface Lock; 1 = Locked BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_MaxSensitivityTeach
Teach the maximum sensitivity of the sensor Command
BOOL
Cmd_PBLock
Local Push Button Lock Command
BOOL
Cmd_PrecisionTeachStart
Teach the desired set point to ensure detection Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachBackground
Learn signal level while target is not present Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachTarget
Learn threshold while target is present Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStartButton
Start Teach command
BOOL
Cmd_WindowStartTeach
Teach SP1 when operating in Window Mode Command
BOOL
Cmd_WindowStopTeach
Teach SP2 when operating in Window Mode Command
BOOL
EnableIn
Enable Input - System Defined Parameter
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel Number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxSignalStrength
Signal Strength of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered status of Sensor
BOOL
Set_Threshold1SP
Set Point – Threshold 1
INT
Set_Threshold2SP
Set Point – Threshold 2
INT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_PBLock
Local Push Button Lock;
1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Val_Count
Sensor Count Value
INT
Val_CounterEN
Counter Enable; 0= Disabled, 1= Enabled
SINT
Val_Display_Ind
Display Indicatio;
0 – Standard Indication (Default)
1 – Percentage Indication
SINT
Val_MarginLevelLow
Display Rotation;
0 – Normal
1 – Rotate 180°
Function;
1 –Hysteresis
2 – Window Mode
Light Source;
0 – Light Source ON (Default)
1 – Light Source OFF
Light Source Adjustment;
1 – 12…50 µs Settings
1 – 5…500 µs – 32 ms Settings
Light Source Mode;
0 – Auto (Default)
1 – Manual
Margin Level – High Multiplier;
0 – 1.2 X (Default), 1 – 1.5 X, 2 – 2.0 X, 3 – 3.0 X, 4 – 4.0 X, 5 – 5.0 X
Margin Level – Low Multiplier;
0 – 0.5 X (Default), 1 – 0.6 X, 2 – 0.7 X, 3 – 0.8 X
Val_OperatingHours_Inception
Operation Hours – Since Inception
DINT
Val_OperatingHours_PowerUp
Operation Hours – Since Power-Up
DINT
Val_Display_Rot
Val_Function
Val_LightSource
Val_LightSourceAdj
Val_LightSourceMode
Val_MarginLevelHigh
Val_OutputPolarityInverted
Val_Pin2Type
Polarity;
0 – Not Inverted (Default)
1 – Inverted
Pin 2 type;
0 – Disabled, 1 – PNP, 2 – NPN
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
503
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Output
504
DataType
Val_ResponseTime
Function/Descritpion
Response Time;
0 – 50 µS, 1 – 500 µs (Default), 2 – 4 mS, 3 – 32 ms
Val_SpeedActual
Speed Actual – Since Power Up
DINT
Val_SpeedMax
Speed Maximum – Since Power Up
DINT
Val_Teach_Status
Teach-in Status
SINT
Val_TeachSelection
Teach type selection
SINT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step Value
DINT
Val_TempActual
Actual Temperature – Since Power Up
SINT
Val_TempMax_SinceInception
Maximum Temperature Since Inception
SINT
Val_TempMax_SincePowerUp
Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
SINT
Val_TempMin_SinceInception
Minimum Temperature Since Inception
SINT
Val_TempMin_SincePowerUp
Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
SINT
Val_Threshold1
Set Point – Threshold 1
INT
Val_Threshold2
Set Point – Threshold 2
INT
Val_Trigger_Counter
Trigger count
DINT
Val_Voltage_MaxPowerUp
Voltage Maximum – Since Power Up
REAL
Val_Voltage_MinPowerUp
Voltage Minimum – Since Power Up
REAL
Val_VoltageActual
Voltage Actual
REAL
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_46DFA_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSAGE
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[20]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_IOLink_46DFA_Inp_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf_5032
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information
Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_46DFA_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Cfg_DisplayIndication
Cfg_DisplayRotation
Cfg_Function
Cfg_LightSource
Cfg_LightSourceAdj
Cfg_LightSourceMode
Cfg_MarginLevelHM
Cfg_MarginLevelLM
Cfg_OutputPolarityInverted
Function/Description
Display Indication;0 – Standard Indication (Default),1 –
Percentage Indication, 2 – Zero Offset Indication, 3 –
Counter Mode Indication
Display Rotation;
0 – Normal
1 – Rotate 180°
Function;
1 – Hysteresis,
2 – Window Mode
Light Source;
0 – Light Source ON (Default)
1 – Light Source OFF
Light Source Adjustment;
1 – 12…50 µs Settings
1 – 5…500 µs – 32 ms Settings
Light Source Mode;
0 – Auto (Default)
1 - Manual
Margin Level – High Multiplier;
0 – 1.2 X (Default), 1 – 1.5 X, 2 – 2.0 X, 3 – 3.0 X, 4 – 4.0 X, 5 –
5.0 X
Margin Level – Low Multiplier;
0 – 0.5 X (Default), 1 – 0.6 X, 2 – 0.7 X, 3 – 0.8 X
Output Polarity;
0 – Not Inverted (Default)
1 – Inverted
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DataType
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
505
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Input
DataType
Cfg_ResponseTime
Function/Description
Pin 2 type;
0 – Disabled, 1 – PNP, 2 – NPN
Response Time;
0 – 50 µS, 1 – 500 µs (Default), 2 – 4 mS, 3 – 32 ms
Cmd_Cancel
Teach Cancel - Cancels the Teach Process Command
BOOL
Cmd_CountReset
Count Reset
BOOL
Cmd_DynamicTeachStart
Dynamic Teach Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_DynamicTeachStop
Dynamic Teach Stop Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalInterfaceLock
Device Access Locks. Local User Interface Lock; 1 = Locked BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Command
BOOL
Cmd_MaxSensitivityTeach
Teach the maximum sensitivity of the sensor Command
BOOL
Cmd_PBLock
Local Push Button Lock Command
BOOL
Cmd_PrecisionTeachStart
Teach the desired set point to ensure detection Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachBackground
Learn signal level while target is not present Command
BOOL
Cmd_StaticTeachTarget
Learn threshold while target is present Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStartButton
Start Teach command
BOOL
Cmd_WindowStartTeach
Teach SP1 when operating in Window Mode Command
BOOL
Cmd_WindowStopTeach
Teach SP2 when operating in Window Mode Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration
Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
EnableIn
Enable Input - System Defined Parameter
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel Number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxSignalStrength
Signal Strength of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered status of Sensor
BOOL
Set_Setpoint
Setpoint
INT
Set_Threshold1SP
Set Point – Threshold 1
INT
Set_Threshold2SP
Set Point – Threshold 2
INT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Cfg_Pin2Type
506
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
SINT
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_PBLock
Local Push Button Lock;
1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_Count
Sensor Count Value
INT
Val_CounterEN
Counter Enable; 0= Disabled, 1= Enabled
SINT
Val_Display_Ind
Display Indicatio;
0 – Standard Indication (Default)
1 – Percentage Indication
SINT
Val_MarginLevelLow
Display Rotation;
0 – Normal
1 – Rotate 180°
Function;
1 –Hysteresis
2 – Window Mode
Light Source;
0 – Light Source ON (Default)
1 – Light Source OFF
Light Source Adjustment;
1 – 12…50 µs Settings
1 – 5…500 µs – 32 ms Settings
Light Source Mode;
0 – Auto (Default)
1 – Manual
Margin Level – High Multiplier;
0 – 1.2 X (Default), 1 – 1.5 X, 2 – 2.0 X, 3 – 3.0 X, 4 – 4.0 X, 5 – 5.0 X
Margin Level – Low Multiplier;
0 – 0.5 X (Default), 1 – 0.6 X, 2 – 0.7 X, 3 – 0.8 X
Val_OperatingHours_Inception
Operation Hours – Since Inception
DINT
Val_OperatingHours_PowerUp
Operation Hours – Since Power-Up
DINT
Val_Display_Rot
Val_Function
Val_LightSource
Val_LightSourceAdj
Val_LightSourceMode
Val_MarginLevelHigh
Val_OutputPolarityInverted
Val_Pin2Type
Polarity;
0 – Not Inverted (Default)
1 – Inverted
Pin 2 type;
0 – Disabled, 1 – PNP, 2 – NPN
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
507
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Output
508
DataType
Val_ResponseTime
Function/Descritpion
Response Time;
0 – 50 µS, 1 – 500 µs (Default), 2 – 4 mS, 3 – 32 ms
Val_SpeedActual
Speed Actual – Since Power Up
DINT
Val_SpeedMax
Speed Maximum – Since Power Up
DINT
Val_Teach_Status
Teach-in Status
SINT
Val_TeachSelection
Teach type selection
SINT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step Value
DINT
Val_TempActual
Actual Temperature – Since Power Up
SINT
Val_TempMax_SinceInception
Maximum Temperature Since Inception
SINT
Val_TempMax_SincePowerUp
Maximum Temperature Since Power Up
SINT
Val_TempMin_SinceInception
Minimum Temperature Since Inception
SINT
Val_TempMin_SincePowerUp
Minimum Temperature Since Power Up
SINT
Val_Threshold1
Set Point – Threshold 1
INT
Val_Threshold2
Set Point – Threshold 2
INT
Val_VoltageNoise
Voltage Noise Value Vpp
SINT
Val_Voltage_MaxPowerUp
Voltage Maximum – Since Power Up
REAL
Val_Voltage_MinPowerUp
Voltage Minimum – Since Power Up
REAL
Val_VoltageActual
Voltage Actual
REAL
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
Chapter 21
Programming Example
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung.L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 46DFA device object connected to channel #0
of a POINT I/O1734-4IOLM IO-Link Master module in slot #13 of a POINT I/O
adapter.
The following example uses the 46DFA device object connected to channel #0
of a ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
509
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
The following example uses the 46DFA device object connected to channel #12
of a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_2.
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP
GO_LaunchGfx_LRIndSensor
510
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102:
AOI
Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. {::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName
Graphic button can be used in
})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
displayed. The text on the button face is set to #121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
the parameter #104.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_46DFA
_Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
511
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
1
2
7
3
8
9
4
5
6
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Threshold Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows Signal Strength, threshold 1 and threshold 2 values over last 30 seconds
Margin low alarm status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Proximity alarm status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
- Function: Displays the operation mode of the sensor output and the available options are
“Hysteresis” or “Window”.
Process Data
- Signal Strength (%): Signal Strength provides the raw measurement value of the amount of light
reflected from the target.
9
- Gain: Displays the excess gain above the sensor threshold to ensure reliable detection of the
target.
- When the Counter Value is enabled, the parameter reflects the sensor count amount. If the counter
functionality is disabled, then “Disabled” text is seen.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name or
Locate Toggle Switch require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab
to update the sensor parameters.
512
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
7
1
3
8
5
2
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
Description
Internal Temperature Bar Graph
Internal Temperature Current Value
Voltage Bar Graph
Voltage Current Value
Speed Bar Graph
Speed Current Value
Operating Hours Since Power Up
Operating Hours Since Inception (lifetime)
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is power
cycled.
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
513
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
decisions. One trend is displayed for Signal Strength, Threshold 1 and
Threshold 2.
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Threshold Setpoints & Signal strength.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the sensor parameter settings, as well as
enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
The configuration section is divided into :
•
514
Operating Configuration
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
•
•
•
•
•
Local device access Locks
Reset Count
Teach Settings
Sensor Configuration (Page 2)
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Operating Configuration
Setpoint Threshold 1 - Allows operators to enter the signal value required for
the sensor output to turn ON (threshold) upon target detection. That means
that the sensor signal level must be higher than the threshold for the output to
turn ON.
Setpoint Threshold 2 - This parameter is updated when the window teach
procedures are executed. The default value for this parameter is 300.
Pin 2 Type- Changes the output type on pin 2. The sensor default when
connected using the AOP is disabled and the output can be changed to operate
as PNP only or NPN only.
Function - Allows operator to change the operation mode of the sensor output
to ‘Hysteresis’ or ‘Window’. Hysteresis mode turns the sensor output ON after
the received signal level is higher than the Threshold 1 parameter, while
Window mode turns the output ON while the received signal level is between
Threshold 1 and Threshold 2.
Polarity - This parameter allows the user to change the sensor output to
operate as non-inverted or inverted.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
515
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Local Device access Locks
Push Button Lock- This parameter allows operators to Lock the local push
button on the sensor. The push button can be unlocked locally following the
unlock procedure.
User Interface Lock- This parameter locks the local user interface and
implements an IO-Link controlled lock. This means that the operator cannot
unlock the sensor locally even if the unlock procedure is implemented using
the push button.
Reset Count
This button allows user to reset the count value already stored in sensor.
Teach Settings
This button navigates to teach settings screen. The available teach methods
are:
Static Teach- Press the ‘Teach Start’ button to initiate the Teach Process.
Place the target in front of the sensor and between the reflectors. Send the
'Teach Target' Command, then remove the target blocking the reflector.
The Teach in status will update to ‘wait for command’.
Show the reflector where the target is present and then send ‘Teach
Background’ Command.
The ‘Static teach’ process is complete and ‘Teach in status’ will be displayed as
‘Idle’.
Dynamic Teach- Press the ‘Teach Start’ button to begin the Teach Process.
While the object is moving in front of the field of view of the sensor, send
‘Dynamic Start’ command.
The Teach in status will be displayed as ‘Wait for Command’ for few seconds.
Send the ‘Dynamic Stop’ command.
The dynamic teach process is completed.
Precision Teach- Place the target in front of the field of view of the sensor and
then send ‘Precision Start’ command.
The ‘Teach in status’ will be displayed as ‘Teach SP1 success’ for few seconds.
The ‘Precision teach’ process is complete.
Max Sensitivity- Place the target in front of the field of view of the sensor and
then send ‘Max Sensitivity’ command.
The ‘Teach in status’ will be displayed as ‘Busy’ for few seconds.The ‘Maximum
sensitivity’ teach process is now complete.
516
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Window Teach- Place the target in front of the field of view of the sensor and
send ‘Window Start’ command. The ‘Teach in status’ will be displayed as ‘Wait
for Command’ for few seconds.
Keep the target from the field of view of the sensor and send ‘Window Stop’
command.The ‘Window Teach’ teach process is now complete.
Sensor Configuration
Margin Level Low Multiplier- Allows you to define when the green LED should
start flashing to reflect a signal level that is below the threshold. The default
value for this parameter is 0.8 with multiple selection options from 0.5…0.8 in
increments of 01X.
Margin Level High Multiplier- Allows you to define when the green LED can
stop flashing to reflect a signal level that is higher than the threshold. The
default value for this parameter is 1.5 with multiple selections that could reach
a maximum of 5X.
Display Rotation- Changes the orientation of the LED display. The default
setting is standard orientation.
Display Indication- Changes how the received light information is displayed
in the sensor LED and received signal strength process data parameter.
Response Time- Changes the sensor response time to increase or decrease the
amount of light received by the sensor. The default response time is 500 µs.
Light Source Adjustment- Changes the LED intensity. When operating in 50
µs Response Time, the maximum intensity that can be set is 12. Operation on
response times higher than 50 µs, can be set up to 15.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
517
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Light Source Mode-Enables automatic or manual operation of the sensor LED
intensity. The default parameter is Auto.
Light Source- Enables or disables the light source of the sensor. The default
value is ON.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
518
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
519
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
520
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
Sensor Type
Select sensor type of 46DFA as per device catalog no.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_46DFA_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
ModuleName
[Master5032]
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
Select the sensor series (i.e. 46DFA), This name depends upon
the TagName assigned to object.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
521
Chapter 21
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
SensorType
46DFA-L2LBT1-xx
46DFA-L2LBT1-xx
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
46DFA-L2LBT1-xx type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL
raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL
raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032
raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
522
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - Io-link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - Io-link Device.ggfx{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_46DFA
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_46DFA-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_46DFA
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_46DFA-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
V3_IO_Link_Images
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
523
Chapter 21
524
46DFA - Small Aperture Fiber-optic Amplifier (raC_Dvc_46DFA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_46DFA_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric
Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Overview
The 45PLA Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor device object
(raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032) includes
HMI faceplates which displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
•
Sensor data
Sensor diagnostics
Sensor configuration and parameters
Process data trending
Device Fault log
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_45PLA_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Health: View device health such as run-hours and temperature.
Sensor Configuration: Configure general sensor parameters including
local LED and lock settings, process data enable/disable, and
adjustment method & sensor application.
Teach: Offers the different teach functions.
The 45PLA Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor pre-configured Device
Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices and
Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplates for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
525
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplates. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. Each device is supplied with
three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one for
compatibility with each IO-Link Master Module. You must select the
appropriate AOI for the master module being used.
Device/Item
45PLA
Compatible IO-Link Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Compatible IO-Link Sensor
45PLA-P2LPT1-F4
45PLA-P2LPT1-F4
Add-On Instruction
raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL_3.02_AOI.L5X
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL_3.02_RUNG.L5X
45PLA-P2LPT1-F4
raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder
Note that a single faceplate is used for either the 4IOL, 8IOL & 5032 versions of
the Add-On Instruction.
FactoryTalk® View ME
FactoryTalk® View SE
Faceplate
Faceplate
Display
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_45PLA-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_45PLA-Faceplate.gfx
Global Object
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Device/Item
Type
45PLA
Graphic Symbols
526
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
Toolbox
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Global Object
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
45PLA
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementation Compatible IO-Link
Object
Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
45PLA
1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL,
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL)
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IOLink_raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_AssetControl_IOLink_raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_45PLA_5032_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Device_IO-Link_raC_LD_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL_(3.2)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
527
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
2. Specify the Application Specific Name e.g. Sensor_1001
3. Select the Process Data Input as Triggered, Margin, Proximity, Gain,
Signal.
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required cyclic device data to pass
information from the device into the add-on instruction.
1.
528
Go to Properties of 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A Master Module >>
General >> Click on Change... and Configure the required channels as a
IO-Link configuration. (Only even nos. of channel can be configured as
a IO-Link)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Note: If Sensor is Class B, Then, User should select the IODD for Class B and Tick on “IO-Link Class B Enabled Check box, Shown
in above image (Applicable for Channel No. 2,3,6 & 7).
2. Whichever channels are selected for 45PLA, you can find them, in IOLink of 5032 Master. Expand the IO-Link tree and select the 45PLA
Sensor.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
529
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
3. Configure the parameters of sensor from configuration tab from AOP
of the 45PLA sensor.
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
530
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL,
InOut
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL)
Ref_Module
Function / Description
DataType
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustSetSubIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetSubIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_45PLA_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
IO-Link Device Type Information Interface raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
IO-Link Device Command, Status Interface raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[20]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_45PLA_Inp_4IOL Or
raC_UDT_ItfAD_45PLA_Inp_8IOL
Input Data
Input
Cfg_MarginLevelHighlMultiplier
Function/Description
DataType
Beam Mode; 0 - Object Detection - Six Beams, 1 - Object
Detection - Five Beams, 2 - Object Detection - Four Beams, 3 Object Detection - Three Beams, 4 - Object Detection - Two
Beams, 5 - Object Detection - One Beam, 8 - Gap Detection - Six DINT
Beams, 9 - Gap Detection - Five Beams, 10 - Gap Detection Four Beams, 11 - Gap Detection - Three Beams, 12 - Gap
Detection - Two Beams, 13 - Gap Detection - One Beam
Margin Level-High Multiplier; 10 - 1.0, 11 - 1.1, 12 - 1.2, 15 - 1.5, DINT
20 - 2.0, 50 - 5.0, 100 - 10.0, 150 - 15.0
Cfg_MarginLevelLowMultiplier
Margin Level-Low Multiplier; 0 - 0.8, 1 - 0.7, 2 - 0.6, 3 - 0.5
SINT
Cfg_Mode
Mode; 0 - PNP, 1 - NPN
SINT
Cfg_OperatingFrequency
Operating Frequency; 0 - 1 (800 uS), 1 - 2 (860 uS)
SINT
Cfg_Pin2Mode
Pin 2 Mode; 0 - Disable, 1 - PNP-Not Inverted, 2 - PNP-Inverted,
3 - NPN-Not Inverted, 4 - NPN-Inverted, 5 - Remote Teach DINT
Input, 6 - Independent Control PNP, 7 - Independent Control
NPN
Cfg_Polarity
Polarity; 0 - Not Inverted, 1 - Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cfg_BeamMode
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
531
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_TeachPrecisionShowReflector
Teach Precision Show Reflector Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStandardShowReflector
Teach Standard Show Reflector Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStart
Teach Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStaticShowReflector
Teach Static Show Reflector Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStaticShowTarget
Teach Static Show Target Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity Alarm of Senor
BOOL
Inp_ChxSignalStrength
Indicates the reflectivity level of the reflector
DINT
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Set_Beam1Emitter1LEDIntensity
Set the LED Intensity for Beam One for Emitter1
DINT
Set_Beam1Receiver1ThresholdEmitter1 Set the Threshold for Beam One Receiver1 for Emitter1
DINT
Set_Beam2Emitter2LEDIntensity
DINT
Set the LED Intensity for Beam Two and Three for Emitter2
Set_Beam2Receiver1ThresholdEmitter2 Set the Threshold for Beam Two Receiver1 for Emitter2
DINT
Set_Beam3Receiver2ThresholdEmitter2 Set the Threshold for Beam Three Receiver2 for Emitter2
DINT
Set_Beam4Emitter3LEDIntensity
Set the LED Intensity for Beam Four and Five for Emitter3
DINT
Set_Beam4Receiver2ThresholdEmitter3 Set the Threshold for Beam Four Receiver2 for Emitter3
DINT
Set_Beam5Receiver3ThresholdEmitter3 Set the Threshold for Beam Five Receiver3 for Emitter3
DINT
Set_Beam6Emitter4LEDIntensity
DINT
Set the LED Intensity for Beam Six for Emitter4
Set_Beam6Receiver3ThresholdEmitter4 Set the Threshold for Beam Six Receiver3 for Emitter4
532
DINT
Set_MarginBooster
Set the multiplier factor that applies to the LEDs current value DINT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller BOOL
Sts_CounterEnabled
Counter Enabled Indication; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Val_Beam1Emitter1LEDIntensity
Displays the LED intensity for Emitter1 for Beam One
DINT
Val_Beam1Receiver1ThresholdEmitter1 Display the Threshold for Beam One Receiver1 for Emitter1
Val_Beam2Emitter2LEDIntensity
DINT
Display the LED Intensity for Beam Two and Three for Emitter2 DINT
Val_Beam2Receiver1ThresholdEmitter2 Display the Threshold for Beam Two Receiver1 for Emitter2
DINT
Val_Beam3Receiver2ThresholdEmitter2 Display the Threshold for Beam Three Receiver2 for Emitter2
DINT
Val_Beam4Emitter3LEDIntensity
Display the LED Intensity for Beam Four and Five for Emitter3 DINT
Val_Beam4Receiver2ThresholdEmitter3 Display the Threshold for Beam Four Receiver2 for Emitter3
DINT
Val_Beam5Receiver3ThresholdEmitter3 Display the Threshold for Beam Five Receiver3 for Emitter3
DINT
Val_Beam6Emitter4LEDIntensity
DINT
Display the LED Intensity for Beam Six for Emitter4
Val_Beam6Receiver3ThresholdEmitter4 Display the Threshold for Beam Six Receiver3 for Emitter4
DINT
Val_BeamMode
Beam Mode Status; 0 - Object Detection - Six Beams, 1 - Object
Detection - Five Beams, 2 - Object Detection - Four Beams, 3 Object Detection - Three Beams, 4 - Object Detection - Two
Beams, 5 - Object Detection - One Beam, 8 - Gap Detection - Six DINT
Beams, 9 - Gap Detection - Five Beams, 10 - Gap Detection - Four
Beams, 11 - Gap Detection - Three Beams, 12 - Gap Detection Two Beams, 13 - Gap Detection - One Beam
Val_Counter
Display Counter Value
DINT
Val_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
SINT
Val_MarginBooster
Display the multiplier factor that applies to the LEDs current value DINT
Val_MarginLevelHighMultiplier
Margin Level-High Multiplier Status; 10 - 1.0, 11 - 1.1, 12 - 1.2, 15 - 1.5, INT
20 - 2.0, 50 - 5.0, 100 - 10.0, 150 - 15.0
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
533
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Output
Function/Descritpion
Val_MarginLevelLowMultiplier
Margin Level-Low Multiplier Status; 0 - 0.8, 1 - 0.7, 2 - 0.6, 3 - 0.5 INT
Val_Mode
Mode Status; 0 - PNP, 1 - NPN
INT
Val_OperatingFrequency
Operating Frequency Satus; 0 - 1 (800 uS), 1 - 2 (860 uS)
INT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Displays the number of hours that the sensor has been
DINT
continuously in operation
Displays the number of targets that have been detected since the DINT
sensor has been in operation
Pin 2 Mode Status; 0 - Disable, 1 - PNP-Not Inverted, 2 - PNPInverted, 3 - NPN-Not Inverted, 4 - NPN-Inverted, 5 - Remote DINT
Teach Input, 6 - Independent Control PNP, 7 - Independent Control
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
Val_Pin2Mode
Val_Polarity
Displays the polarity of channel; 0 = Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Speed
Display the the actual frequency of detection in
Hertz
DINT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
Val_Temperature
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp
Displays the internal temperature information available in the SINT
sensor
Reflects the maximum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
die of the sensor since inception
Reflects the maximum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
die of the sensor since the last power up
Reflects the minimum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
die of the sensor since inception
Reflects the minimum temperature inside of the microprocessor SINT
die of the sensor since the last power up
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInception
534
DataType
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
BOOL
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Ref_MsgCustSetIdx
Message Configuration Write
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Message Configuration Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgModReconfigure Message Module Reconfigure
MESSEAG
Ref_MsgData
Messaging Data
raC_UDT_45PLA_Sensor_Data
Ref_Ctrl_Set
IO-Link Device Setting Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSet
Ref_Ctrl_Cmd
IO-Link Device Command Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlCmd
Ref_Ctrl_Sts
IO-Link Device Status Interface
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_CtrlSts
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
IO-Link Device Type Information
Interface
IO-Link Device Command, Status
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Inf_Lookup
Code / Description List Entry
raC_UDT_LookupMember_STR0082[20]
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_45PLA_Inp_5032
Cfg_C
Device Object Configuration
raC_UDT_IOLink_45PLA_Cfg
Input Data
Input
Cfg_MarginLevelHighlMultiplier
Function/Description
DataType
Beam Mode; 0 - Object Detection - Six Beams, 1 - Object
Detection - Five Beams, 2 - Object Detection - Four Beams, 3
- Object Detection - Three Beams, 4 - Object Detection - Two
Beams, 5 - Object Detection - One Beam, 8 - Gap Detection - DINT
Six Beams, 9 - Gap Detection - Five Beams, 10 - Gap
Detection - Four Beams, 11 - Gap Detection - Three Beams, 12
- Gap Detection - Two Beams, 13 - Gap Detection - One Beam
Margin Level-High Multiplier; 10 - 1.0, 11 - 1.1, 12 - 1.2, 15 - 1.5, DINT
20 - 2.0, 50 - 5.0, 100 - 10.0, 150 - 15.0
Cfg_MarginLevelLowMultiplier
Margin Level-Low Multiplier; 0 - 0.8, 1 - 0.7, 2 - 0.6, 3 - 0.5
SINT
Cfg_Mode
Mode; 0 - PNP, 1 - NPN
SINT
Cfg_OperatingFrequency
Operating Frequency; 0 - 1 (800 uS), 1 - 2 (860 uS)
SINT
Cfg_Pin2Mode
Pin 2 Mode; 0 - Disable, 1 - PNP-Not Inverted, 2 - PNPInverted,
3 - NPN-Not Inverted, 4 - NPN-Inverted, 5 - Remote Teach DINT
Input, 6 - Independent Control PNP, 7 - Independent Control
NPN
Cfg_Polarity
Polarity; 0 - Not Inverted, 1 - Inverted
SINT
Cmd_DisableLEDs
Indicator Disabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_EnableLEDs
Indicator Enabled Command
BOOL
Cmd_LocalTeachLock
Parameters Unlock/Lock Cmd
BOOL
Cmd_Locate
Locator Disable/Enable Command
BOOL
Cmd_ResetCount
Counter Reset Command
BOOL
Cfg_BeamMode
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
535
Chapter 22
536
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Input
Function/Description
DataType
Cmd_TeachApply
Teach Apply Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachPrecisionShowReflector
Teach Precision Show Reflector Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStandardShowReflector
Teach Standard Show Reflector Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStart
Teach Start Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStaticShowReflector
Teach Static Show Reflector Command
BOOL
Cmd_TeachStaticShowTarget
Teach Static Show Target Command
BOOL
Cmd_ApplyConfiguration
Module reconfigure Command
BOOL
Inp_ChNumber
Configured Channel number for Master
SINT
Inp_ChxGain
Gain of Sensor
INT
Inp_ChxMarginLowAlarm
Margin Low Alarm of Sensor
BOOL
Inp_ChxProximityAlarm
Proximity Alarm of Senor
BOOL
Inp_ChxSignalStrength
Indicates the reflectivity level of the reflector
DINT
Inp_ChxTriggered
Triggered Status of Sensor
BOOL
Set_Beam1Emitter1LEDIntensity
Set the LED Intensity for Beam One for Emitter1
DINT
Set_Beam1Receiver1ThresholdEmitter Set the Threshold for Beam One Receiver1 for Emitter1
1
DINT
Set_Beam2Emitter2LEDIntensity
Set the LED Intensity for Beam Two and Three for Emitter2
DINT
Set_Beam2Receiver1ThresholdEmitte Set the Threshold for Beam Two Receiver1 for Emitter2
r2
Set_Beam3Receiver2ThresholdEmitte Set the Threshold for Beam Three Receiver2 for Emitter2
r2
DINT
Set_Beam4Emitter3LEDIntensity
Set the LED Intensity for Beam Four and Five for Emitter3
DINT
Set_Beam4Receiver2ThresholdEmitte Set the Threshold for Beam Four Receiver2 for Emitter3
r3
Set_Beam5Receiver3ThresholdEmitte Set the Threshold for Beam Five Receiver3 for Emitter3
r3
DINT
Set_Beam6Emitter4LEDIntensity
DINT
Set the LED Intensity for Beam Six for Emitter4
DINT
DINT
Set_Beam6Receiver3ThresholdEmitte Set the Threshold for Beam Six Receiver3 for Emitter4
r4
Set the multiplier factor that applies to the LEDs current
Set_MarginBooster
value
DINT
Set_TrendMaxValue
Trend Tab Max value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Set_TrendMinValue
Trend Tab Min value for VD/ME/SE faceplate
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DINT
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Output Data
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_bNotReady
Enumerated state value:
0 = Reserved
1 = Device not connected
2 = Device not available
3 = Device is faulted
4 - 31 = Reserved
DINT
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation
Controller
BOOL
Sts_CounterEnabled
Counter Enabled Indication; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCfg
1=Inhibit user Configuration Parameters from HMI Faceplate;
0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
1=Inhibit user Commands from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow Control BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
1=Inhibit user Settings from HMI Faceplate; 0=Allow
BOOL
Sts_LocalTeachLock
Local Parameterization; 0= Unlock, 1= Locked
BOOL
Sts_Located
Locator Indicator; 1= Located
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_ApplyConfiguration
Module Reconfigure Request On Status
BOOL
Val_Beam1Emitter1LEDIntensity
Displays the LED intensity for Emitter1 for Beam One
DINT
Val_Beam1Receiver1ThresholdEmitter Display the Threshold for Beam One Receiver1 for Emitter1
1
Val_Beam2Emitter2LEDIntensity
Display the LED Intensity for Beam Two and Three for Emitter2 DINT
Val_Beam2Receiver1ThresholdEmitter Display the Threshold for Beam Two Receiver1 for Emitter2
2
Val_Beam3Receiver2ThresholdEmitte Display the Threshold for Beam Three Receiver2 for Emitter2
r2
Val_Beam4Emitter3LEDIntensity
DINT
DINT
DINT
Display the LED Intensity for Beam Four and Five for Emitter3 DINT
Val_Beam4Receiver2ThresholdEmitte Display the Threshold for Beam Four Receiver2 for Emitter3
r3
Val_Beam5Receiver3ThresholdEmitte Display the Threshold for Beam Five Receiver3 for Emitter3
r3
DINT
Val_Beam6Emitter4LEDIntensity
DINT
Display the LED Intensity for Beam Six for Emitter4
DINT
Val_Beam6Receiver3ThresholdEmitte Display the Threshold for Beam Six Receiver3 for Emitter4
DINT
r4
Beam Mode Status; 0 - Object Detection - Six Beams, 1 - Object
Detection - Five Beams, 2 - Object Detection - Four Beams, 3 Object Detection - Three Beams, 4 - Object Detection - Two
Val_BeamMode
Beams, 5 - Object Detection - One Beam, 8 - Gap Detection - DINT
Six Beams, 9 - Gap Detection - Five Beams, 10 - Gap Detection Four Beams, 11 - Gap Detection - Three Beams, 12 - Gap
Detection - Two Beams, 13 - Gap Detection - One Beam
Val_Counter
Display Counter Value
DINT
Val_EnableLEDs
LED Indicator; 0= Disable, 1= Enable
SINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
537
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Output
DataType
Val_MarginLevelLowMultiplier
Function/Descritpion
Display the multiplier factor that applies to the LEDs current
value
Margin Level-High Multiplier Status; 10 - 1.0, 11 - 1.1, 12 - 1.2, 15 1.5, 20 - 2.0, 50 - 5.0, 100 - 10.0, 150 - 15.0
Margin Level-Low Multiplier Status; 0 - 0.8, 1 - 0.7, 2 - 0.6, 3 0.5
Val_Mode
Mode Status; 0 - PNP, 1 - NPN
INT
Val_OperatingFrequency
Operating Frequency Satus; 0 - 1 (800 uS), 1 - 2 (860 uS)
INT
Val_OperatingHrsSinceInception
Displays the number of hours that the sensor has been
DINT
continuously in operation
Displays the number of targets that have been detected since DINT
the sensor has been in operation
Pin 2 Mode Status; 0 - Disable, 1 - PNP-Not Inverted, 2 - PNPInverted, 3 - NPN-Not Inverted, 4 - NPN-Inverted, 5 - Remote DINT
Teach Input, 6 - Independent Control PNP, 7 - Independent
Val_MarginBooster
Val_MarginLevelHighMultiplier
Val_OperatingHrsSincePowerUp
Val_Pin2Mode
INT
INT
Val_Polarity
Displays the polarity of channel; 0 = Not Inverted, 1=Inverted
INT
Val_RangeMax
Sensor Maximum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_RangeMin
Sensor Minimum Range in Trend
DINT
Val_Speed
Display the the actual frequency of detection in
Hertz
DINT
Val_TeachStep
Teach Step
INT
Val_Temperature
SINT
Val_TemperatureMinSincePowerUp
Displays the internal temperature information available in the
sensor
Reflects the maximum temperature inside of the
microprocessor die of the sensor since inception
Reflects the maximum temperature inside of the
microprocessor die of the sensor since the last power up
Reflects the minimum temperature inside of the
microprocessor die of the sensor since inception
Reflects the minimum temperature inside of the
microprocessor die of the sensor since the last power up
raC_Dvc_ADFramework_DV_LD
Unique Parameter Name for auto - discovery
BOOL
Val_TemperatureMaxSinceInception
Val_TemperatureMaxSincePowerUp
Val_TemperatureMinSinceInception
538
DINT
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
SINT
SINT
SINT
SINT
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung .L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 45PLA device object connected to channel #2 of
a POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module named Point_IO_4IOLMaster in
slot #14 of a POINT I/O adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the 45PLA device object connected to channel #3 of
a ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
539
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
The following example uses the 45PLA device object connected to channel #8 of
a 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_2
Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
GO_LaunchFP
AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label. #102:
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
This launch button graphic object allows the user #104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
to navigate to the device object faceplate.
The text on the button face is set to the parameter Tag.@Description
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
GO_LaunchGfx_LightSens
Faceplate navigation button with string tag label.
This launch button graphic object allows the
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.
Graphic button can be used in
{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
schematic style displays where a
#104:Custom button label. Leave blank to use
system/network diagram is shown.
Tag.@Description
When available, basic module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live value is
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
displayed. The text on the button face is set to
the parameter #104.
540
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
AOG_45PLA
_Launch
Faceplates
Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
The supplied launch button in
View Designer is used to navigate
to the faceplate in a user
application.
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data and the Locate button.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
541
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
1
2
6
3
7
4
8
5
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Signal Strength Sparkline Trend
The spark line shows the signal strength value.
Margin Low Alarm indicates, when the target Signal is marginal and about to fail.
Proximity Alarm indicates, if there is a target in the background that may be in close proximity to the
threshold.
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
The Beam Mode defines the number of active beams and operation logic that is applied to the state
of the beams.
Process Data
- Signal strength indicates the reflectivity level of the reflector, which makes this feature ideal for
continuous monitoring.
8
- Gain displays the excess gain above the sensor threshold to confirm reliable detection of the
target.
- When the Counter Value is enabled, the parameter reflects the sensor count amount. If the counter
functionality is disabled, then “Disabled” text is seen.
Note: In Case of, 5032 Master, changes made to the Application Specific Name or
Locate Toggle Switch require pressing the 'Config Apply' button in the Config tab
to update the sensor parameters.
Health Tab
Health tab provides different diagnostic information of sensor which helps
ensure that sensors are operating correctly.
542
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
5
1
3
6
2
4
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Speed Bar Graph
Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Speed Current Value
Internal Temperature Bar Graph
Green Indicators: Min/Max since inception (lifetime)
Purple Indicators: Min/Max since power up
Blue Triangle Indicator: Current value
Internal Temperature Current Value
Operating Hours Since Power Up
Operating Hours Since Inception (lifetime)
Inception/Lifetime values are recorded since the first time the sensor was ever
powered ON. These value are retained and not reset during default factory reset.
Power Up values are reset to zero and recorded new each time the sensor is power
cycled.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
543
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Trend Tab
Trends display values over time, often used to compare similar or related
values and to allow operators to predict future states to make control action
decisions. Trend is displayed for Signal Strength.
Trend Settings Screen
We can set trend limits using configuration tab by clicking on the Settings
button present on trend screen. This sub screen display contains two numeric
input elements that allow the user to enter the minimum and maximum values
to be used on the Trend screen for Signal strength.
Configure Tab
The configuration tab displays the various parameter settings and options, as
well as enabling the user to read data from the sensor.
544
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
The configuration section is divided into sections:
•
•
•
•
Operation Configuration
Sensor Configuration
Teach Settings
Configuration Apply Settings
In case of 5032 Master, ”Config Apply” Button on Configure tab should be pressed
compulsory after updating parameters on faceplate.
Operation Configuration
Intensity and Threshold - Allows the user to set the LED intensity and
Threshold for Beam-1 to Beam-6.
Local Teach Parameters - This section allow user to lock / unlock device local
parameterization. Touch Lock/Unlock Toggle switch to Lock Local
Parameterization
Disable/Enable LEDs - This parameter allows operators to turn OFF or turn
ON the User Interface LEDs (green and orange LEDs). This parameter is ideal
for applications where turning OFF the LEDs is desired to accommodate the
application.
Reset Count - Allows users to reset the counter function, it will reset the sensor
counts to zero.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
545
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Sensor Configuration
Margin Level- Low Multiplier - Allows the user to defines the signal level at
which the green LED starts flashing, indicating it is below the threshold.
Margin Level- High Multiplier - Allows the user to determines when the green
LED can stop flashing, indicating a signal level higher than the threshold.
Operating Frequency - In certain applications, where it's necessary to place
two 45PLA sensors in close proximity, their emission may interfere with each
other. Adjusting the operating frequency helps mitigate such interference.
Polarity - Allows the user to change the sensor output to operate as NonInverted or Inverted.
Beam Mode - Allows the user to define the number of active beams and
operation logic that is applied to the state of the beams.
Pin2 Mode - Allows the user to enables the operation of the output on pin 2 in
IO-Link Mode.
Mode - Allows the user to change the output mode to operate as PNP or NPN.
Margin Booster - Allows the user to indicate the multiplier factor that applies
to the current value of the LEDs.
Teach Settings
Teach Settings display includes the Teach Mode, Teach procedure flow
buttons, and Teach Apply button. Touch on the Teach Settings navigation
button to access the Teach Settings tab.
Teach tab includes the following functions.
•
546
Teach mode selection dropdown menu
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
•
Teach procedure flow buttons
Teach mode - This parameter selects the desired mode.
Static Teach - The first method is Static Teach.
1. Press the “Teach Start” button to initiate the Teach Process
2. Place the target in front of the sensor while ensuring it is placed in
between the reflector. Press the “Show Target” command button. Once
the target has been displayed, remove it from obstructing the reflector.
3. Show the reflector where the target is present and then press the “Show
Reflector” button.
4. Send the “Teach Apply” command to finalize the teach process.
Standard Teach - The second method is Standard Teach.
1.
Press the “Teach Start” button to begin the Teach Process.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
547
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
2. Place the reflector in front of the sensor's field of view and send “Show
Reflector” command.
3. Press the “Teach Apply” button to finalize the teach process.
Precision Teach - The third method is Precision Teach.
1. Press the “Teach Start” button to begin the Teach Process.
2. Place the reflector in front of the sensor's field of view and send the
“Show Reflector” command.
3. Send the “Teach Apply” command to finalize the teach process.
Configuration Apply Settings
Config Apply - This Button allows user to Update the configuration
parameters after modifying the parameters on faceplate.
Ideally, “Config Apply” button on Configuration tab is disabled, as shown in
below image.
If User Changes any Parameter from Configuration Tab, then, “Config apply”
Button is Enabled. For updating the desired change in Sensor, user needs to
Click on “Config Apply” Button, as shown in below image.
548
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
After updating the Parameters, “Config Apply” Button gets disabled still there
is any parameter change by the User.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information for up to four faults for the device.
The fault table displays the Severity level (Fault, Warning or Active Fault), time
(and date) and a description of the fault.
Note, only row 1 will display the “Active Fault” in the severity column if there is
a current active fault, else it will display the last fault. Rows 2-4 only display
past faults and warnings, not an active fault.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
549
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Banner
Last fault is in first row and show in bold if active
Yellow border visible when a fault is active
Fault severity
Fault event time
4 most recent fault/warning event messages
Click on any row in the fault table to view fault details. The details window
provides a more detailed description and possible action steps to remedy
condition.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL,
raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
550
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL,
raC_LD_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
ChannelNumber
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
MasterName
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
MasterName
[MasterName]
Module
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_45PLA_5032
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Select the sensor series (i.e. 45PLA), This name depends upon the
TagName assigned to object.
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
MasterReferance
[Master5032]
ModuleName
Mod_{ObjectName}
Mod_{ObjectName} Module
SensorType
45PLA-P2LPT1-F4
45PLA-P2LPT1-F4
Select the sensor from drop down list. with this selection, AOI
45PLA-P2LPT1-F4 type of the sensor is generated in ACD. (i.e. Type1, Type2 or
Type3)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
551
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
ChannelNumber
Navigation Button
Select the Channel Number where the sensor is connected.
GraphicalButton
HMI Configuration Select the Launch Button Type for Generate the HMI through ACM.
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL
raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL
raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032
raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
552
Name
Description
File Name
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_45PLA
Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_45PLA-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_45PLA
Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_45PLA-Faceplate.gfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
HMI Image Set
Extraction Path
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 22
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
553
Chapter 22
554
45PLA - Polarized Light Array Photoelectric Sensor (raC_Dvc_45PLA_4IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_8IOL, raC_Dvc_45PLA_5032)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
20
IO-Link HUB
Overview
The IO-Link HUB device object (raC_Dvc_1732IL_10X6M12,
raC_Dvc_1732IL_16CFGM12M12L, raC_Dvc_1732IL_IB16M12_8IOL) includes
HMI faceplate’s which displays device information including:
•
•
Module description, status, and faults
Channel description, status
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_IO-Link_HUB_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Required Files
IO Device Objects include HMI faceplates. There is no controller programming
required other than the creation of the I/O module in the project. If using
FactoryTalk® View ME/SE you must also import the tag import file
FTViewStudio_IOLinkLibrary_Tags_3_00.CSV to support navigation on
faceplates.
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME/SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all images located in the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images
- png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View ME files are stored in the /HMI FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in
the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library folder.
Device/Item
Type
1732IL_10X6M12
1732IL_16CFGM12M12L
1732IL_IB16M12
Display
Display
Display
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_01-ME) raC_Dvc_1732IL_10X6M12-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3_01-ME) raC_Dvc_1732IL_16CFGM12M12-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3_01-ME) raC_Dvc_1732IL_IB16M12-Faceplate.gfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_01-SE) raC_Dvc_1732IL_10X6M12-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3_01-SE) raC_Dvc_1732IL_16CFGM12M12-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3_01-SE) raC_Dvc_1732IL_IB16M12-Faceplate.gfx
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
555
Chapter 20
IO-Link HUB
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
IO-Link HUB
Graphic Symbols
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
raC_Dvc_1732IL_Hubs.vpd
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays.
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFP10X6HUB
GO_LaunchFP16CFGHUB
GO_LaunchFPIB16HUB
556
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102: Faceplate Display Name e.g. (raC-3_00-ME) raC_Dvc_XXXX_XXXXFaceplate navigation button with string tag Faceplate or (raC-3_00-SE) raC_Dvc_XXXX_XXXX-Faceplate
label.
#103: IO Module Input Tag e.g. {::[Topic Name]Local:1:I}
This launch button graphic object allows the #104: IO Module Output Tag e.g. {::[Topic Name]Local:1:O}
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #105: Channel No e.g. (0....7)
The text on the button face is set to the
#106: Custom button label e.g.g (HUB_100)
parameter #106.
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#102: Faceplate Display Name e.g. (raC-3_00-ME) raC_Dvc_XXXX_XXXXFaceplate or (raC-3_00-SE) raC_Dvc_XXXX_XXXX-Faceplate
#103: IO Module Input Tag e.g. {::[Topic Name]Local:1:I}
#104: IO Module Output Tag e.g. {::[Topic Name]Local:1:O}
#105: Channel No e.g. (0....7)
#106: Custom button label e.g.g (HUB_101)
#130: Channel0 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#131: Channel1 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#132: Channel2 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
Faceplate navigation button with string tag #133: Channel3 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
label.
#134: Channel4 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
This launch button graphic object allows the #135: Channel5 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #136: Channel6 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
The text on the button face is set to the
#137: Channel7 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
parameter #106.
#138: Channel8 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#139: Channel9 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#140: Channel10 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#141: Channel11 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#142: Channel12 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#143: Channel13 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#144: Channel14 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#145: Channel15 Configuration (Input =I, Output =O)
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate Display Name e.g. (raC-3_00-ME) raC_Dvc_XXXX_XXXXFaceplate navigation button with string tag #102:
Faceplate or raC-3_00-SE) raC_Dvc_XXXX_XXXX-Faceplate
label.
IO Module Input Tag e.g. {::[Topic Name]Local:1:I}
This launch button graphic object allows the #103:
#104:
Channel No e.g. (0....7)
user to navigate to the device object faceplate. #105: Custom
button label e.g.g (HUB_102)
The text on the button face is set to the
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
parameter #104.
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
IO-Link HUB
Configuring FactoryTalk View Objects
Graphic Symbol Name
Graphic Symbol
Configured Parameter
This IO-Link Hub is connected to the Channel 0 of 1732E-8IOL Master module named “MASTER1”
GO_LaunchFP10X6HUB
This IO-Link Hub is connected to the Channel 1 of 1734-4IOL Master module installed in the “Slot 13” of the communication
adapter module named “AENTR1”
GO_LaunchFP16CFGHUB
This IO-Link Hub is connected to the Channel 2 of 1732E-8IOL Master module named “MASTER1”
GO_LaunchFPIB16HUB
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
557
Chapter 20
IO-Link HUB
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol Name Graphic Symbol
Description
Property Configuration
This IO-Link Hub is connected to the Channel 0 of 1732E-8IOL Master module named “MASTER1”
10X6M12
The supplied launch
buttoninView Designer
is used to navigate to
the faceplate in a user
application.
This IO-Link Hub is connected to the Channel 0 of 1732E-8IOL Master module named “Master8IOL_48”
IB16M12
558
The supplied launch
buttoninView Designer
is used to navigate to
the faceplate in a user
application.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
Graphic
Symbol Name Graphic Symbol
Description
IO-Link HUB
Property Configuration
This IO-Link Hub is connected to the Channel 1 of 1732E-8IOL Master module named “MASTER”
16CFGM12M12L
The supplied launch
buttoninView Designer
is used to navigate to
the faceplate in a user
application.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
559
Chapter 20
IO-Link HUB
Faceplates
1732IL_IB16M12
The 1732IL_IB16 is the 16 Channel Digital Input IO-Link Hub. The main tab of
the faceplate is the Home tab, which displays information regarding the Input
channels. The banner at the top of the faceplate displays module status and
fault information.
1
2
3
5
4
Item
1
Description
Faceplate title bar
#106: Custom button label e.g. (HUB_100)
Module ready status.
GREEN = Ready
2
YELLOW = Module Fault/Not Ready
Channel Status
BLUE = Active/High
3
GREY = Inactive/Low
Faulted Condition
560
4
I: Digital Input Channel
6
Channeldescription:Ch.@Description
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
IO-Link HUB
1732IL_10X6M12
The 1732IL_10X6M12 is the 10 Channel Digital Input, 6 Channel Digital Output
IO-Link Hub. The main tab of the faceplate is the Home tab, which displays
information regarding the I/O channels. The banner at the top of the faceplate
displays module status and fault information.
1
2
3
6
4
5
Item
1
Description
Faceplate title bar
Module ready status.
GREEN = Ready
2
YELLOW = Module Fault/Not Ready
Channel Status
BLUE = Active/High
3
GREY = Inactive/Low
Faulted Condition
4
I: Digital Input Channel
5
O: Digital Output Channel
6
Channeldescription:Ch.@Description
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
561
Chapter 20
IO-Link HUB
1732IL-16CFGM12M12L
The 1732IL-16CFGM12M12L is the 16 Channel Configurable Digital Input /
Output IO-Link Hub. The main tab of the faceplate is the Home tab, which
displays information regarding the I/O channels. The banner at the top of the
faceplate displays module status and fault information.
1
2
3
6
4
5
Item
1
Description
Faceplate title bar
Module ready status.
GREEN = Ready
2
YELLOW = Module Fault/Not Ready
Channel Status
BLUE = Active/High
3
GREY = Inactive/Low
Faulted Condition
562
4
I: Digital Input Channel
5
O: Digital Output Channel
6
Channeldescription:Ch.@Description
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 20
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
IO-Link HUB
563
Chapter 20
564
IO-Link HUB
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter
21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Overview
The IO-Link Master device object (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster) includes HMI
faceplate’s which displays device information including:
•
•
•
•
Sensor Trigger data
Sensor Locate & Navigation
Event & Time
Channel Status (Non-IO Link Channels)
In the Library there is a folder named Videos which contains many How-To and Operational Overview Videos which walk step-bystep through each process. You can refer to the following videos for this section:
“Operational_Overview_of_IO-Link_Master_Objects_Faceplate.MP4”
Primary device object configuration functions include:
•
•
Functional Description
Locate: This function helps to locate the sensors using the device’s LED
in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other.
Navigation: This is used to Navigate the sensor object with respective
to that channel.(Applicable for FTView ME/SE Faceplate & Not for View
Designer Faceplate)
The IO-Link Master Device Objects:
•
•
•
Collect, Process and Deliver Data between Smart Devices as well as
Non-IO Link Devices and Application Logic
Provide Device Status & Diagnostics Faceplate's for Machine Startup,
Commissioning, Operations, and Maintenance
Include Common HMI Faceplate Components, Device States, and
Control Interfaces providing Application Development and Operation
Efficiency
All these features provide quick feedback, shorten recovery time, and simplify
implementation.
Required Files
Device Objects include Add-On Instructions (AOIs) and HMI faceplate's. The
revision number (e.g. 1.01) used in filenames can change as new revisions are
created.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
565
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Controller Files
Add-On Instructions are reusable code objects that contain encapsulated logic
that can streamline implementing your system. This lets you create your own
instruction set for programming logic as a supplement to the instruction set
provided natively in the ControlLogix® firmware. An Add-On Instruction is
defined once in each controller project, and can be instantiated multiple times
in your application code as needed.
The Add-On Instruction must be imported into the controller project to be
used in the controller configuration. These can be imported as Add-On
Instruction files, or as part of the Rung Import or Import Library Objects
wizard.
All Add-On Instruction and Rung Import files can be found in the /Studio 5000
Logix Designer Files - L5X/ folder in the library. IO-Link Master device is supplied
with three versions of Add-On Instructions (AOI) and Rung import files - one
for compatibility with 1734-4IOL Master Module second for compatibility with
1732E-8IOL Master Module and third for compatibility with 5032-8IOL Master
Module. You must select the appropriate AOI for the master module being
used.
Device/Item
IO-Link Master
Compatible IO-Link Master
POINT I/O 1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Add-On Instruction
raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster_3.02_AOI.L5X
Rung Import
raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster_3.02_RUNG.L5X
raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster_3.02_AOI.L5X
raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster_3.02_RUNG.L5X
FactoryTalk View HMI Files
FactoryTalk View ME or SE applications require importing the desired device
faceplates in addition to all Global Object (ggfx) files and all images located in
the /HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png/ folder of the library. FactoryTalk View
ME files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View ME/ library folder and
FactoryTalk View SE files are stored in the /HMI - FactoryTalk View SE/ library
folder.
Device/Item
Type
1734-4IOL
1732E-8IOL
5032-8IOL
Graphic Symbols
Toolbox
Display
Display
Display
Global Object
Global Object
566
FactoryTalk View ME
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_1734_4IOL-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOL-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3_02-ME) raC_Dvc_5032_8IOL-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-ME) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
FactoryTalk View SE
Faceplate
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_1734_4IOL-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOL-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3_02-SE) raC_Dvc_5032_8IOL-Faceplate.gfx
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
(raC-3-SE) Toolbox - IO-Link Device.ggfx
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Studio 5000 View Designer HMI Files
All Studio 5000 View Designer Files can be found in the /HMI - ViewDesigner vpd/ folder of the library.
Device/Item
IO-Link Master
Studio 5000 View Designer Faceplate
(raC-3_02-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager Files
Studio 5000 Application Code Manager (ACM) can be optionally used if it is
installed. All devices can be easily registered in the ACM repositories by
running the setup.cmd file located in the root folder of the library.
Individual HSL4 files are provided as an alternative to running the setup.cmd
to allow users to manually register specific implementation objects. Each
object has two files - an Asset Control file and a Device file. The Asset Control
files include attachments of all required files for that object. The Device files
are used to actually add that device into a Studio 5000 project and these
reference the Asset Control files.
All Studio 5000 Application Code Manager files can be found in the /
ApplicationCodeManagerLibraries/ folder of the library. The files included are as
follows:
Implementa Compatible IO-Link
tion Object Master
POINT I/O
1734-4IOL
ArmorBlock
IO-Link
1732E-8IOLM12R
Master
5032-8IOLM12DR
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A
5032-8IOLM12P5DR
Device Definition
Asset Control File (.HSL4)
Device File (.HSL4)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO-Link_raC_Dvc_1734_4IOL_Master_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Module_IO-Link_1734-4IOL_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO-Link_raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOL_Master_(3.2) (RA-LIB)_Device_Module_IO-Link_1732E-8IOLM12R_(3.2)
(RA-LIB)_Device_Asset-Control_IO-Link_raC_Dvc_5032_8IOL_Master_(3.2) (RA-LIB)_Device_Module_IO-Link_50328IOLMaster_(3.2)
(raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required device data to pass information
from the device into the add-on instruction.
•
1.
When using 1732E-8IOLM12R/B 8 Channel IO-Link Master, its required
to change Data Connection in the Module Definition.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
567
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
2. Click on Connection and select the Timestamp Data
Device Definition
(raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
The device must be configured with the correct device definition. Proper
device configuration enables the required device data to pass information
from the device into the add-on instruction.
•
1.
568
When using 5032-8IOLM12M12LDR 8 Channel IO-Link Master, its
required to change Data Connection in the Module Definition.
Click on Change...
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
2. User need to assign Channel modes as per their desired hardware
connection to 5032 Master. Below table shows the available Channel
modes in 5032 Master Module
Channel Nos. 0,2,4,6,8,10.12 & 14 can only be assigned as a IO-Link.
Channel Mode
Description
Disabled
Channel is Disabled.
Digital Output, Short Circuit, No
Load
Channel is Configured as a Digital Output.
Digital Input
Channel is Configured as a Digital Input.
IO-Link
Channel is Configured as a IO-Link
Digital Output
Channel is Configured as a Digital Output.
Digital Input, Counter
Channel is Configured as a Digital Input.
Digital Input, Fallback
Channel is Configured as a Digital Input.
Digital Output, Short Circuit
Channel is Configured as a Digital Output.
Digital Input, Timestamp
Channel is Configured as a Digital Input.
Digital Input, Timestamp,
Fallback
Channel is Configured as a Digital Input.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
569
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Operations
The IO-Link Device objects provide only physical operation mode. There is no
virtual device mode offered.
Execution
The following table explains the handling of instruction execution conditions.
Condition
Description
Processing for EnableIn False (false rung) is handled the same as if the device were
EnableIn False (false rung) taken out of service by Command. The device outputs are de-energized and the device
is shown as Program Out of Service on the HMI. All alarms are cleared.
570
Powerup (prescan, first
scan)
On prescan, any commands that are received before first scan are discarded. The
device is de-energized. On first scan, the device is treated as if it were returning from
Hand command source: the instruction state is set based on the position feedback that
is received from the device. If the feedback is valid for one position, the device is set to
that position. If the device does not have position feedback or the position feedback is
invalid, the device is set to the ‘unknown/powerup’ state.
The command source is set to its default, either Operator or Program (unlocked).
Postscan
No SFC Postscan logic is provided.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Add-On Instruction I/O Data InOut Data
(raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster)
InOut
Function / Description
DataType
Ref_MsgCustGetIdx
Channel Assemblies Read
MESSAGE
Ref_MsgData
Channel Status Modes information
Ref_Ctrl_Inf
Sensor Type Information Interface
raC_UDT_IOLinkMaster_5032_Diag_
Assembly
raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkSensor_Inf
Ref_Ctrl_Itf
Device Command, Status Information Interface raC_UDT_ItfAD_IOLinkDevices
Ref_Module
Reference to module in I/O tree
MODULE
Inp_I
Device Object Inputs
raC_UDT_ItfAD_4IOL_Master_Inp /
raC_UDT_ItfAD_4IOL_Master_Inp
Output
Function/Descritpion
DataType
Sts_Active
Device active status: 1 = output power structure is active
BOOL
Sts_Available
Device is available for interaction with user code
BOOL
Sts_Connected
Device is connected to the Programmable Automation Controller
BOOL
Sts_Faulted
Device faulted status: 1 = an active fault exists
BOOL
Sts_Ready
Device is ready to perform primary function
BOOL
Sts_Warning
Device warning status: 1 = an active alarm or warning exists
BOOL
Sts_InhibitCmd
Disable Command inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_InhibitSet
Disable Setting inputs from external sources
BOOL
Sts_eNotReady
Device Not Ready Status
DINT
Output Data
Sts_bNotReady
Sts_bFaultCh
Bitwise device 'not ready' reason
0: Reserved
1: Master Communication Loss
2: Master Not Available
3: Faulted
4 - 31: Reserved
Bitwise Channel faulted status
1 = an active fault exists
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
DINT
INT
571
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Programming Example
Fully configured device on a rung is provided below for reference.
Note that this programming example is the same code that is imported when
either importing the supplied rung.L5X files or when using Application Code
Manager or the Studio 5000 Import Library Objects wizard plug-in.
The following example uses the 4IOL IO-Link Master device object connected
with the module POINT I/O 1734-4IOL IO-Link Master module named
PointIO_4IOL_Master in slot #3 of a POINT I/O adapter named Rack01.
The following example uses the IO-Link Master device object connected to
ArmorBlock 1732E-8IOLM12R IO-Link Master module in named
Armor_8IOL_MasterB.
The following example uses the IO-Link Master device object connected to
5032-8IOLM12M12LDR/A IO-Link Master module in named
Mod_Master_5032_1.
Graphic Symbols
572
Graphic Symbols are used as launch buttons within HMI applications to open
up faceplate displays. See Basic Launch Button Attributes section for details on
configuration and indicators.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
FactoryTalk View ME/SE Graphic Symbols
Graphic Symbol Name
GO_LaunchFPMaster
GO_LaunchGfx_4IOL_8IOLMa
ster
GO_LaunchGfx_5032Master
Graphic Symbol
Description
Global Object Parameter Values
#102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
Faceplate navigation
#104: Custom button label. Leave blank to use Tag.@Description
button with string tag
#110: CH0 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
label.
#111: CH1 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
This launch button
#112: CH2 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
graphic object allows the #113: CH3 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
user to navigate to the #114: CH4 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
device object faceplate. #115: CH5 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
The text on the button #116: CH6 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
face is set to the
#117: CH7 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
parameter #104.
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
Faceplate navigation
#104: Custom button label. Leave blank to use Tag.@Description
button with string tag
#110: CH0 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
label.
#111: CH1 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
This launch button
#112: CH2 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
graphic object allows the #113: CH3 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
user to navigate to the #114: CH4 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
device object faceplate. #115: CH5 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
The text on the button #116: CH6 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
face is set to the
#117: CH7 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
parameter #104.
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
Faceplate navigation
button with string tag
label.
This launch button
graphic object allows the #102: AOI Backing Tag Instance (e.g.{::[PAC]Program::IOLinkProgram._InstanceName})
user to navigate to the #104: Custom button label. Leave blank to use Tag.@Description
device object faceplate. #110: CH0 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
Graphic button can be #111: CH2 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
used in
CH4 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
schematic style displays #112:
#113:
CH6 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
where a
CH8 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
system/network diagram #114:
#115: CH10 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
is shown.
#116: CH12 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
When available, basic
#117: CH14 AOI Backing Tag (Enter 0, If there is no sensor connected to the channel)
module
#120: Display’s left position (e.g. 100) (optional)
diagnostics and a live
#121: Display’s top position (e.g. 100) (optional)
value is
displayed.
The text on the button
face is set to the
parameter #104.
Note that for unused channels enter 0 value.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
573
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Studio 5000 View Designer Graphic Symbols
Graphic
Symbol
Name
Graphic Symbol
Description
AOG_4IOL_L
aunch
The supplied launch button in View
Designer is used to navigate to the
faceplate in a user application.
AOG_8IOL_L
aunch
The supplied launch button in View
Designer is used to navigate to the
faceplate in a user application.
AOG_5032_
Launch
The supplied launch button in View
Designer is used to navigate to the
faceplate in a user application.
Property Configuration
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
Faceplates
(raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is user)
configurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
574
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data.
2
1
3
5
4
6
7
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Channel Fault - There is a fault one or more channel
Channel Faulted
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Depending on type of sensor connected to channel the no. of trigger signal are appear. Total 16
Trigger available on display.
Process Data: Displays the process value and its units.
Channel is not configured for IO-Link or Disabled
Navigation
Page 1- Ch0 to Ch3.
Page 2- Ch4 to Ch7
Page 3- Ch8 to Ch11
Page 4- Ch12 to Ch15
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
575
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Located
The Locate tab is the second tab of the faceplate. It provides the each channels
App Sensor Name, Counter, Signal Strength, Location and Navigation to the
respective IO-Link device object.
2
3
4
5
1
Item
1
2
3
4
5
Description
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Counter- Displays the sensor counter value
Signal Strength- Displays the Signal Strength Value
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until the
operator disables this function
Object: Navigate to the Sensor Object for more detailed information
The View Designer faceplate object lacks the capability of Object Navigation.
576
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information of first fault with time stamp
captured for each IO-Link Channel device.
1
Item
1
2
Faceplates
(raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster
)
2
Description
Last fault description
Last fault Time captured
There are basic faceplate attributes that are common across all instructions.
See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 37.
The faceplate title is linked to _InstanceName.@description, the .@description
extended tag property of the Add-On Instruction instance. This is userconfigurable from controller/program tags in Studio 5000 Logix Designer.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
577
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Home
The Home tab is the main tab of the faceplate. It provides the status of the IOLink device along with sensor process data.
2
1
3
6
5
4
7
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
578
Description
Banner- Ready Status
Channel Fault - There is a fault for one or more channels (In this Case, CH0 is Faulted)
Channel Faulted (In this Case, CH0 is Faulted)
Trigger Status
OFF (0) = Gray LED
ON (1) = Blue LED
Depending on type of sensor connected to channel the no. of trigger signal are appear. Total 16
Trigger available on display.
Process Data: Displays the process value and its units.
Channel is not configured for IO-Link, But Configured for Other Modes. Below is the List of Other
Modes :
-Disabled
-Digital Output, Short Circuit, No Load
-Digital Input
-Digital Output
-Digital Input, Counter
-Digital Input, Fallback
-Digital Output, Short Circuit
-Digital Input, Timestamp
-Digital Input, Timestamp, Fallback
Navigation
Page 1- Ch0 to Ch3.
Page 2- Ch4 to Ch7
Page 3- Ch8 to Ch11
Page 4- Ch12 to Ch15
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
In Addition to above status, There are few more conditions explained below:
Shown Status and description messages are explained by Assuming that, User
already configured the Master and Sensor hardware in their Project. as shown in
below image:
5032 Master is in Fault/Disconnected State
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
Description
Banner- Not Ready Status
Message- Master Communication Loss
Channel Description: No Data Available
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
579
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Sensor AOI is not Configuring in PLC Logic.
In the above image, we can find the CH8 description. This description appears
when Sensor and Master hardware is configured and AOI is not configured in
PLC logic.
Locate
The Locate tab is the second tab of the faceplate. It provides the each channels
App Sensor Name, Counter, Signal Strength, Location and Navigation to the
respective IO-Link device object.
2
3
1
6
580
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
4
5
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Description
Application Specific Name - Read from device
Counter- Displays the sensor counter value
Signal Strength- Displays the Signal Strength Value
Locate toggle switch
Locate the sensor in large machines where there are several sensors close to each other. When
Located, the sensor user interface (green and orange LEDs) start flashing synchronously until
the operator disables this function
Object: Navigate to the Sensor Object for more detailed information
Channel is not configured for IO-Link, But Configured for Other Modes. Below is the List of Other
Modes :
-Disabled
-Digital Output, Short Circuit, No Load
-Digital Input
-Digital Output
-Digital Input, Counter
-Digital Input, Fallback
-Digital Output, Short Circuit
-Digital Input, Timestamp
-Digital Input, Timestamp, Fallback
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
581
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
The View Designer faceplate object lacks the capability of Object Navigation.
In Addition to above status, There are few more conditions explained below:
Shown Status and description messages are explained by Assuming that, User
already configured the Master and Sensor hardware in their Project. as shown in
below image:
5032 Master is in Fault/Disconnected State
1
2
3
Item
1
2
3
582
Description
Banner- Not Ready Status
Message- Master Communication Loss
Channel Description: No Data Available
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Sensor AOI is not Configuring in PLC Logic.
In the above image, we can find the CH8 description. This description appears
when Sensor and Master hardware is configured and AOI is not configured in
PLC logic.
Fault Warning Tab
The Fault Warning tab displays information of first fault with time stamp
captured for each IO-Link Channel device.
1
Item
1
2
2
Description
Last fault description (In this Case, CH2 is Faulted)
Last fault Time captured (In this Case, CH2 is Faulted)
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
583
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
In Addition to above status, There are few more conditions explained below:
Shown Status and description messages are explained by Assuming that, User
already configured the Master and Sensor hardware in their Project. as shown in
below image:
5032 Master is in Fault/Disconnected State
1
2
3
4
Item
1
2
3
4
584
Description
Banner- Not Ready Status
Message- Master Communication Loss
Channel Description: Connection Faulted (AOI for Sensor Connected on CHO is running in PLC
Logic).
Channel Description: No Data Available (AOI for Sensor Connected on CH2 is not running in PLC
Logic).
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Sensor AOI is not Configuring in PLC Logic.
In the above image, we can find the CH8 description. This description appears
when Sensor and Master hardware is configured and AOI is not configured in
PLC logic.
Application Code Manager
IO-Link Device Library objects can be set-up and configured using Studio 5000
Application Code Manager.
Refer to the section Using Application Code Manager for complete details.
Definition Objects: raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster
This object contains the AOI definition and used as linked library to
implement object. There is one definition and per add-on instruction to
support each IO-Link Master Module. This gives flexibility to choose to
instantiate only definition and create custom implement code. User may also
create their own implement library and link with this definition library object.
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
585
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster,
raC_LD_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object implement
rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object that
are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
[MasterName]
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying a
red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered name
exists in the project.
Ch0_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 0.
Ch1_AOI_BackingTagRefe
rence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 1.
Ch2_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 2.
Ch3_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 3.
Ch4_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 4.
Ch5_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 5.
Ch6_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 6.
Ch7_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 7.
MasterName
MasterName
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel tags a
red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the program can
still be generated.
586
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
Implementation Objects: raC_LD_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster
Parameter Name
Default Value
Instance Name
Definition
Description
RoutineName
{ObjectName}
{RoutineName}
Routine
Enter Routine name. Routine will be created and Object
implement rung(s) inserted.
A JSR will be inserted in MainRoutine.
If routine name already exists, then object will be inserted into
existing routine.
By default, parameter is set to Object Name.
TagName
{ObjectName}
{TagName}
Backing Tag
Enter the backing tag of the main AOI.
This will serve as the base tag name for other tags in this object
that are derived from the base.
TagDescription
{ObjectDescription}
{TagDescription}
Tag Description of the main AOI backing tag
[MasterName]
Module
Select the IO-Link master module. If connecting to a non-library
object module, enter the name of the master only. Note: entering
non-library object modules will result in the parameter displaying
a red X. This will still generate properly as long as the entered
name exists in the project.
Ch0_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 0.
Ch2_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 2.
Ch4_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 4.
Ch6_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 6.
Ch8_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 8.
Ch10_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 10.
Ch12_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 12.
Ch14_AOI_BackingTagRef
erence
Module
Select the AOI Tag for the Sensor Connected on Channel No. 14.
MasterName
MasterName
Note that if the tag names are manually entered or not linked to input channel
tags a red ‘X’ will be shown beside the parameter. This is acceptable and the
program can still be generated.
Linked Libraries
Link Name
Catalog Number
Revision
Solution
Category
raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMater
raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
587
Chapter 21
IO-Link Master (raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster, raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster)
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster
raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster
raC_Dvc_5032_8IOLMaster
3.2
(RA-LIB) Device
IO-Link
Configured HMI Content
HMI Content
Instance Name
Description
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button ME
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance Text
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchTextFP Global
Button
Launch Button SE
Object configured callout instance
{ObjectName}_GO_LaunchGraphFP Global
Graphical Button
Attachments
Name
Description
File Name
Extraction Path
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols ME
(raC-3-ME) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_Global
Graphic Symbols SE
(raC-3-SE) Graphic Symbols - IO-Link Device.ggfx
{ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Global Object - ggfx
V3_raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_1734-4IOLMaster_Faceplate.gfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_1734_4IOLMaster Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_1734-4IOLMaster_Faceplate.gfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster Faceplate ME
(raC-3_xx-ME) raC_Dvc_1732E-8IOLMaster_Faceplate.gfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewME\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_1732E_8IOLMaster Faceplate SE
(raC-3_xx-SE) raC_Dvc_1732E-8IOLMaster_Faceplate.gfx {ProjectName}\Visualization\FTViewSE\Displays - gfx
V3_raC_Dvc_IOLink
View Designer
(raC-3_xx-VD) raC_Dvc_IOLink.vpd
{ProjectName}\Visualization\ViewDesigner - vpd
V3_RM_raC_Dvc_IO_Link
Reference Manual
DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P.pdf
{ProjectName}\Documentation
V3_IO_Link_Images
HMI Image Set
HMI FactoryTalk View Images - png.zip
{ProjectName}\Visualization\Images - png
588
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
Rockwell Automation IO-Link Device Library Reference Manual
Rockwell Automation Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
589
Rockwell Automation Support
Use these resources to access support information.
Technical Support Center
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers
Technical Documentation Center
Literature Library
Product Compatibility and Download Center
(PCDC)
Find help with how-to videos, FAQs, chat, user forums, Knowledgebase, and product
notification updates.
Locate the telephone number for your country.
Quickly access and download technical specifications, installation instructions, and user
manuals.
Find installation instructions, manuals, brochures, and technical data publications.
Download firmware, associated files (such as AOP, EDS, and DTM), and access product
release notes.
rok.auto/support
rok.auto/phonesupport
rok.auto/techdocs
rok.auto/literature
rok.auto/pcdc
Documentation Feedback
Your comments help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve our content, complete the
form at rok.auto/docfeedback.
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)
At the end of life, this equipment should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental compliance information on its website at rok.auto/pec.
Allen-Bradley, expanding human possibility, and Rockwell Automation are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
EtherNet/IP is a trademark of ODVA, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş. Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752, İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400 EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
Publication DEVICE-RM300C-EN-P - July 2024
RAC-RM300B-EN-P - August 2023
Copyright © 2024 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
">